0% found this document useful (0 votes)

358 views410 pages

RTN 980 V100R006C10 IDU Hardware Description 01

TN 980 V100R006C10 IDU Hardware Description 01

Uploaded by

Micogen

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

358 views410 pages

RTN 980 V100R006C10 IDU Hardware Description 01

TN 980 V100R006C10 IDU Hardware Description 01

Uploaded by

Micogen

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 410

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System

V100R006C10

IDU Hardware Description

Issue 01
Date 2013-12-15

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 980 V100R006C10

iManager U2000 V200R001C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:

l Network planning engineer

l Hardware installation engineer
l Installation and commissioning engineer
l Field maintenance engineer
l Data configuration engineer
l System maintenance engineer

Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:

l Basics of digital microwave communication

l Basics of the OptiX RTN 980

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,

which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level

of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,

which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a

problem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasize

or supplement important points of the main
text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description About This Document

Convention Description

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates are as follows.

Updates in Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C10

This document is the first issue for V100R006C10.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Network Application......................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Components....................................................................................................................................................................4
1.3 Radio Link Types...........................................................................................................................................................8

2 Chassis...........................................................................................................................................10
2.1 Chassis Structure..........................................................................................................................................................11
2.2 Installation Mode..........................................................................................................................................................11
2.3 Air Flow........................................................................................................................................................................12
2.4 IDU Labels...................................................................................................................................................................12

3 Boards............................................................................................................................................16
3.1 Board Appearance........................................................................................................................................................18
3.2 Board List.....................................................................................................................................................................19
3.3 CSHN............................................................................................................................................................................24
3.3.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................24
3.3.2 Application................................................................................................................................................................24
3.3.3 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................25
3.3.4 Working Principle......................................................................................................................................................34
3.3.5 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................37
3.3.6 DIP Switches and CF Card........................................................................................................................................47
3.3.7 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................49
3.3.8 Types of SFP Modules..............................................................................................................................................50
3.3.9 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................51
3.4 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................................55
3.4.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................55
3.4.2 Application................................................................................................................................................................55
3.4.3 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................56
3.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................57
3.4.5 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................62
3.4.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................64
3.4.7 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................65

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

3.5 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................................67
3.5.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................67
3.5.2 Application................................................................................................................................................................67
3.5.3 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................68
3.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................71
3.5.5 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................75
3.5.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................77
3.5.7 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................78
3.6 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................................81
3.6.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................81
3.6.2 Application................................................................................................................................................................81
3.6.3 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................82
3.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................85
3.6.5 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................89
3.6.6 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................92
3.6.7 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................93
3.7 ISU2..............................................................................................................................................................................96
3.7.1 Version Description...................................................................................................................................................96
3.7.2 Application................................................................................................................................................................96
3.7.3 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................98
3.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................102
3.7.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................105
3.7.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................108
3.7.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................109
3.8 ISX2............................................................................................................................................................................114
3.8.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................114
3.8.2 Application..............................................................................................................................................................114
3.8.3 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................115
3.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................119
3.8.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................123
3.8.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................126
3.8.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................127
3.9 ISV3............................................................................................................................................................................133
3.9.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................................133
3.9.2 Application..............................................................................................................................................................134
3.9.3 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................136
3.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................141
3.9.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................145
3.9.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................................147
3.9.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................149
3.10 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA................................................................................................................................159

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

3.10.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................159

3.10.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................159
3.10.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................161
3.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................166
3.10.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................169
3.10.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................175
3.10.7 Types of SFP Modules..........................................................................................................................................177
3.10.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................178
3.11 EG4/EG4P................................................................................................................................................................183
3.11.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................183
3.11.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................183
3.11.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................185
3.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................190
3.11.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................193
3.11.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................198
3.11.7 Types of SFP Modules..........................................................................................................................................199
3.11.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................201
3.12 EMS6........................................................................................................................................................................206
3.12.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................206
3.12.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................206
3.12.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................207
3.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................212
3.12.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................214
3.12.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................219
3.12.7 Types of SFP Modules..........................................................................................................................................220
3.12.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................221
3.13 EFP8.........................................................................................................................................................................223
3.13.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................223
3.13.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................223
3.13.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................225
3.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................228
3.13.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................231
3.13.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................234
3.13.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................236
3.14 SL1D/SL1DA...........................................................................................................................................................236
3.14.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................236
3.14.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................237
3.14.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................239
3.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................241
3.14.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................243
3.14.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................245

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

3.14.7 Board Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................247

3.14.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................247
3.15 ML1/MD1.................................................................................................................................................................249
3.15.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................249
3.15.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................249
3.15.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................250
3.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................253
3.15.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................255
3.15.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................259
3.15.7 Board Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................260
3.15.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................260
3.16 CQ1...........................................................................................................................................................................261
3.16.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................261
3.16.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................261
3.16.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................263
3.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................266
3.16.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................268
3.16.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................270
3.16.7 Types of SFP Modules..........................................................................................................................................271
3.16.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................273
3.17 SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................................................................................................275
3.17.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................275
3.17.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................275
3.17.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................276
3.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................277
3.17.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................279
3.17.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................284
3.17.7 Board Feature Code...............................................................................................................................................285
3.17.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................285
3.18 AUX..........................................................................................................................................................................286
3.18.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................286
3.18.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................287
3.18.3 Working Principle..................................................................................................................................................287
3.18.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................288
3.18.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................292
3.18.6 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................293
3.19 PIU............................................................................................................................................................................295
3.19.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................295
3.19.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................295
3.19.3 Working Principle..................................................................................................................................................295
3.19.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................297

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

3.19.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................298

3.19.6 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................299
3.20 FAN..........................................................................................................................................................................299
3.20.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................................299
3.20.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................300
3.20.3 Working Principle..................................................................................................................................................300
3.20.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................302
3.20.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................303
3.20.6 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................304

4 Accessories..................................................................................................................................305
4.1 E1 Panel......................................................................................................................................................................306
4.2 PDU............................................................................................................................................................................308
4.2.1 Appearance..............................................................................................................................................................308
4.2.2 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................309
4.2.3 Functions and Working Principles..........................................................................................................................310
4.3 AC Power Box............................................................................................................................................................311
4.3.1 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................311
4.3.2 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................................312
4.3.3 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................313
4.3.4 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................316
4.3.5 Power Cable.............................................................................................................................................................317

5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................321
5.1 Power Cable................................................................................................................................................................323
5.2 PGND Cable...............................................................................................................................................................324
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................324
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable.............................................................................................................................................324
5.3 IF Jumper....................................................................................................................................................................325
5.4 XPIC Cable.................................................................................................................................................................326
5.5 Fiber Jumper...............................................................................................................................................................327
5.6 STM-1 Cable..............................................................................................................................................................329
5.7 E1 Cables....................................................................................................................................................................330
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment.....................................................................................................330
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel.......................................................................................................................334
5.8 Orderwire Cable.........................................................................................................................................................336
5.9 Network Cable............................................................................................................................................................337

6 Function Differences Between Boards of the Same Type.................................................341

6.1 Differences Between General-Purpose IF Boards......................................................................................................342
6.2 Differences Between Packet Ethernet Boards............................................................................................................343

A Quick Reference....................................................................................................................... 345

A.1 Photos of Boards' Front Panels..................................................................................................................................346

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

A.1.1 Photos of System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards....................................................................................346

A.1.2 Photos of IF Boards................................................................................................................................................346
A.1.3 Photos of Service Boards........................................................................................................................................347
A.2 Board Loopback Types..............................................................................................................................................349
A.3 Indicators of Boards...................................................................................................................................................350
A.4 Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board.......................................................................................................371

B Glossary......................................................................................................................................373

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

1 Introduction

About This Chapter

The OptiX RTN 980 is a product in the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission system series.

1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave
transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission
solution for mobile communication network or private networks.

1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 980 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 980 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU 980 through an IF cable.

1.3 Radio Link Types

The OptiX RTN 980 provides the radio links of various types in which different IF boards and
ODUs are configured for diverse microwave application scenarios.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.1 Network Application

OptiX RTN 900 Product Family

The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a variety of service interfaces and can be installed easily and
configured flexibly. The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a solution that can integrate TDM
microwave, Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave technologies according to the
networking scheme for the sites, achieving smooth upgrade from TDM microwave to Hybrid
microwave, and from Hybrid microwave to Packet microwave. This solution meets the
transmission requirements of 2G, 3G, and LTE services while also allowing for future network
evolution and convergence.

There are four types of OptiX RTN 900 V100R006C10 products: OptiX RTN 905, OptiX RTN
950, OptiX RTN 950A, and OptiX RTN 980. Users can choose the product best suited for their
site.

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 does not provides V100R006C10 version.

Table 1-1 OptiX RTN 900 product family

Product Name IDU Appearance Characteristic

OptiX RTN 905 l 1 U high IDU.

l Five types of integrated chassis (1A/2A/1C/1E/2E).
l One or two microwave links.

OptiX RTN 910 l 1 U high IDU.

l Boards pluggable.
l Integrated service ports on system control,
switching, and timing boards.
l One or two IF boards.

OptiX RTN 950 l 2 U high IDU.

l Boards pluggable.
l 1+1 protection for system control, switching, and
timing boards.
l A maximum of six IF boards.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2

Product Name IDU Appearance Characteristic

OptiX RTN 950A l 2 U high IDU.

l Boards pluggable.
l Integrated service ports on system control,
switching, and timing boards.
l A maximum of six IF boards.

OptiX RTN 980 l 5 U high IDU.

l Boards pluggable.
l 1+1 protection for system control, switching, and
timing boards.
l Integrated service ports on system control,
switching, and timing boards.
l A maximum of fourteen IF boards.

OptiX RTN 980

The OptiX RTN 980 is large-capacity nodal microwave equipment deployed at the convergence
layer. It supports the convergence of up to 14 radio links, and supports multiple protection
schemes. Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN
980.

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 supports a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies, and is therefore
compatible with varied backhaul networks. Specifically, packet services can be backhauled through TDM
networks, and TDM services can be backhauled through packet networks.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3

Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 980

Raido trassmission network Regional

backhaul
network

STM-1/4
STM-1/4 TDM Network
(SDH)

STM-1/4

Packet Network FE/GE

GE (PTN)
ATM

FE/GE
FE/GE Ethernet Network
(Metro)

Radio link Cable/fiber

OptiX RTN 980 OptiX RTN 905/910/950 RNC BSC

1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 980 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 980 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU 980 through an IF cable.

IDU 980
The IDU 980 is the indoor unit for an OptiX RTN 980 system. It receives and multiplexes
services, performs service processing and IF processing, and provides the system control and
communications function.

Table 1-2 lists the basic features of the IDU 980.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4

Table 1-2 Features of the IDU 980

Item Description

Chassis height 5U

Pluggable Supported

Number of radio directions 1 to 14

RF configuration mode l 1+0 non-protection configuration

l N+0 non-protection configuration
l Nx(1+0) non-protection configuration
l 1+1 protection configuration
l N+1 protection configuration (N 7)
l XPIC configuration

Service interface type l E1 interface

l STM-1 optical/electrical interface
l STM-4 optical interface
l FE optical/electrical interface
l GE optical/electrical interface

Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 980

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5

ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit for the OptiX RTN 900. It converts frequencies and amplifies
signals.

The OptiX RTN 900 product series can use the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering
the entire frequency band from 6 GHz to 42 GHz.

NOTE

Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz
frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing.

Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs that the OptiX RTN 980 supports

Item Description

High-Power ODU Low Capacity

ODU

ODU type XMC-2 XMC-1

Frequency band 6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/15/18/23/26/28/32/38/4 7/8/11/13/15/18/23

2 GHz GHz

Microwave QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/ QPSK/16QAM

modulation scheme 256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM
(6/10/10.5/11/13/15/18/23/26/28/32/38/42
GHz, 7/8 GHz XMC-2E)
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/
256QAM (7/8 GHz Normal)

Channel spacing 7/14/28/40/50/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

(6/7/8/10/11/13/15/18/23/26/28/32/38/42
GHz)
7/14/28 MHz (10.5 GHz)

Table 1-4 RTN 600 ODUs that the OptiX RTN 980 supports

Item Description

High-Power ODU Standard Power Low Capacity

ODU ODU

ODU type HP, HPA SP, SPA LP

Frequency band 6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/ 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 7/8/11/13/15/18/23

15/18/23/26/28/32/3 26/38 GHz (SP GHz
8 GHz (HP ODU) ODU)
6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2 6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2
3 GHz (HPA ODU) 3 GHz (SPA ODU)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6

Item Description

High-Power ODU Standard Power Low Capacity

ODU ODU

Microwave QPSK/16QAM/ QPSK/16QAM/ QPSK/16QAM

modulation scheme 32QAM/64QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM 128QAM/256QAM

Channel spacing 7/14/28/40/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

(6/7/8/10/11/13/15/1
8/23/26/28/32/38
GHz)
7/14/28 MHz (10.5
GHz)

There are two methods for mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate
mounting.

l The direct mounting method is generally adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and
single-polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna,
the ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for
one antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hence referred to as a hybrid coupler) must
be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 illustrates the direct mounting
method.
The direct mounting method can also be adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and
dual-polarized antenna is used. Two ODUs are mounted onto an antenna using an
orthomode transducer (OMT). The method for installing an OMT is similar to that for
installing a hybrid coupler.

Figure 1-3 Direct mounting

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7

l The separate mounting method is adopted when a large- or medium-diameter and single-
or dual-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-4 shows the separate mounting method. In this
situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted (two ODUs share one feed boom).

Figure 1-4 Separate mounting

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 provides an antenna solution that covers the entire frequency band, and supports
single-polarized antennas and dual-polarized antennas with diameters of 0.3 m to 3.7 m along with the
corresponding feeder system.

1.3 Radio Link Types

The OptiX RTN 980 provides the radio links of various types in which different IF boards and
ODUs are configured for diverse microwave application scenarios.

Table 1-5 Radio link types that the OptiX RTN 980 supports

Radio Link Type System Control, IF Board ODU

Switching, and
Timing Board

Low-capacity PDH CSHN IF1 Low capacity ODU

microwave

SDH/PDH CSHN IF1 Standard power ODU or

microwave high power ODU

High-capacity SDH CSHN ISU2 Standard power ODU or

microwave ISV3 high power ODU

High-capacity SDH CSHN ISX2 Standard power ODU or

microwave ISV3 high power ODU
supporting XPIC

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8

Radio Link Type System Control, IF Board ODU

Switching, and
Timing Board

Integrated IP CSHN IFU2 Standard power ODU or

microwave ISU2 high power ODU

ISV3

Integrated IP CSHN IFX2 Standard power ODU or

microwave ISX2 high power ODU
supporting XPIC
ISV3

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9

2 Chassis

About This Chapter

The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is a 5U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and
on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces.

2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 980 chassis are 225 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
980 chassis has a ten-layered structure that is air cooled.

2.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 980 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.

2.3 Air Flow

An IDU 980 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.

2.4 IDU Labels

Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10

2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 980 chassis are 225 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
980 chassis has a ten-layered structure that is air cooled.

Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 980.

Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 980

H
D W

2.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 980 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.

The IDU 980 can be installed:

l In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet
l In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11

l In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet
l In a 19-inch open rack

2.3 Air Flow

An IDU 980 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.
Figure 2-2 shows the air flow in an IDU 980 chassis.

Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 980 chassis

2.4 IDU Labels

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12

Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels
may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.

Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels

Label Label Name Description

ESD protection Indicates that the

label equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.

Grounding label Indicates the

grounding position
of the IDU chassis.

CAUTION Fan warning label Warns you not to

touch fan leaves
when the fan is
Hazardous moving
parts,keep fingers and
other body parts away .

rotating.

High temperature Indicates that the

warning label board surface
temperature may
exceed 70C when
the ambient
temperature is
higher than 55C.
Wear protective
gloves to handle
the board.

Power caution label Instructs you to

read related
instructions before
performing any
power-related
tasks.
For details, see
Labels in 3.19.4
Front Panel.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13

Label Label Name Description

/ QUALIFICATION CARD Qualification card Indicates that the

label equipment has
been quality
checked.

HUAWEI

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA

RoHS label Indicates that the

equipment
complies with the
related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS directive.

Product nameplate Indicates the

label product name and
certification.

! W A R N IN G
-48V O U T P U T
Operation warning The ODU-PWR
TURN O FF PO W ER BEFO RE
D IS C O N N E C T IN G IF C A B LE
label switch must be
turned off before
the IF cable is
removed.

Operation guidance Instructs you to

label slightly pull the
switch lever
PULL outwards before
setting the switch
to the "I" or "O"
position.

Label Position
Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 980.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14

Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 980 labels

! 22kg(48.41b)
/QUALIFICATION CARD

HUAWEI

HUAW EI TE CHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA

CAUTION PULL

WARNING
Hazardous moving
parts,keep fingers -48V OUTPUT
and other body
parts away. TURN OFF POWER BEFORE

DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15

3 Boards

About This Chapter

The IDU 980 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing
boards, IF boards, Ethernet boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, power supply boards, and fan
boards.

3.1 Board Appearance

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 980 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 980 chassis are 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm.
3.2 Board List
The IDU 980 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
3.3 CSHN
The CSHN is the integrated system control, switching, and timing board.
3.4 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.5 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.
3.6 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.7 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radiomode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.
3.9 ISV3

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16

ISV3 boards are multi-purpose IF boards that support Integrated IP radio, SDH radio, and DC-
I power distribution. Once the appropriate license files are loaded, the boards also support cross
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC).

3.10 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA
The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE
electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/
EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed
electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore
can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the
EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports.

3.11 EG4/EG4P
EG4/EG4P boards are 4xGE interface boards, which provide flexible combinations of port types
to meet a wide variety of service requirements. One EG4/EG4P board provides a maximum of
four ports, two always being RJ45 electrical ports and the other two being small form-factor
pluggable (SFP) ports or RJ45 electrical ports. On an EG4P board, the two fixed RJ45 electrical
ports provide the OptiX RTN 310 with power and service signals simultaneously.

3.12 EMS6
The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It
provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical modules.

3.13 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.

3.14 SL1D/SL1DA
The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board.The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide
STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules.Besides all the functions provided by
the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function.

3.15 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.

3.16 CQ1
CQ1 boards are 4-port channelized STM-1 processing boards.

3.17 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.

3.18 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 980. One NE can house
only one AUX.

3.19 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 980 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.

3.20 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17

3.1 Board Appearance

NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.

Board Appearance
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of an ISU2 board in an IDU 980 chassis.

Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board

H
D W

Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help
you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code
(as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18

Figure 3-2 Bar code

Bar code

0514721055000015-SL91EG401

Internal code
Board version
Board name
Board feature code

NOTE
Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example,
the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EG4) indicate the type of SFP module being
used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the impedance
of E1 ports.

3.2 Board List

The IDU 980 provides various functions with different boards inserted.

Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EXT) Slot 14 (EXT)

Slot 11 (EXT) Slot 12 (EXT)

Slot 9 (EXT) Slot 10 (EXT)

Slot 28 Slot 20 (CSHN)
(FAN)
Slot 7 (EXT) Slot 8 (EXT)

Slot 15 (CSHN)

Slot 5 (EXT) Slot 6 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 1 (EXT) Slot 2 (EXT)

NOTE

"EXT" represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19

Table 3-1 List of the IDU boards

Board Board Name Valid Slot

Acronym Description

CSHN Hybrid system Slot 15/20 l Provides full time division cross-connections with
control, higher order cross-connect capacity of 128x128
switching, and VC-4s and lower order cross-connect capacity of
timing board 32x32 VC-4s.
l Provides packet switching capacity of 22 Gbit/s.
l Performs system communication and control.
l Provides the clock processing function, supports one
external clock input/output and two external time
inputs/outputs. External time interface 1 shares a
port with the external clock interface.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial
interface, and one NM cascading interface.
l Provide two STM-4 or STM-1 optical interfaces
equipped with SFP modules.
l Provides two GE interfaces. Each GE interface can
use the RJ45 electrical module or SFP optical
module.
l Provides one Huawei outdoor cabinet monitoring
interface. The outdoor cabinet monitoring interface
shares a port with external time interface 2.

ISU2 Universal IF Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface.

board l Supports modulation schemes from QPSK to
256QAM.
l Supports integrated IP radio and SDH radio. The
supported service modes are Native E1+Ethernet,
Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH.
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports Ethernet frame header compression.
l Supports the PLA function.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20

Board Board Name Valid Slot

Acronym Description

ISX2 Universal XPIC Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface.

IF board l Supports modulation schemes from QPSK to
256QAM.
l Supports integrated IP radio and SDH radio. The
supported service modes are Native E1+Ethernet,
Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH.
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports the AM booster function.
l Supports Ethernet frame header compression.
l Supports the PLA function.

ISV3 Versatile IF Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface.

board l Supports QPSK to 1024QAM modulation plus
QPSK/16QAM strong FEC, and 512AM/1024QAM
light FEC.
l supports interconnected with OptiX RTN 905 (in
modulation schemes from QPSK strong to
1024QAM light).
l Supports interconnection with ISU2/ISX2 boards
(in modulation schemes of QPSK to 256QAM)
l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH
microwave. The supported service modes are Native
E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH.
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports Ethernet frame header compression.
l Supports the PLA function.

IF1 SDH IF board Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface.

l Supports modulation schemes from QPSK to
128QAM.
l Supports the TU-based PDH radio solution and the
STM-1-based SDH radio solution.

IFU2 Universal IF Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface.

board l Supports modulation schemes from QPSK to
256QAM.
l Supports integrated IP microwave in Native E1
+Ethernet service mode.
l Supports the AM function.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21

Board Board Name Valid Slot

Acronym Description

IFX2 Universal XPIC Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface.

IF board l Supports modulation schemes from QPSK to
256QAM.
l Supports integrated IP microwave in Native E1
+Ethernet mode.
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports the AM function.

SL1D 2xSTM-1 Slot 1 to slot 14 Uses SFP modules to provide two STM-1 optical/
interface board electrical interfaces.

SL1DA 2xSTM-1 Slot 1 to slot 6 Uses SFP modules to provide two STM-1 optical/
interface board electrical interfaces.

CQ1 4-port Slot 1 to slot 14 l Uses the SFP optical module to provide four
channelized channelized STM-1 optical/electrical interfaces.
STM-1 interface l Supports CES E1 and ML-PPP E1 functions for E1s
board in STM-1 frame.
l Supports transmission of overhead bytes over CES
E1.

EM6T 6-port RJ45 Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

Ethernet/ l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are
Gigabit Ethernet compatible with the FE electrical interface.
interface board
l Supports synchronous Ethernet.

EM6F 4-port RJ45 + 2- Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

port SFP Fast l Uses SFP modules to provide two GE/FE optical
Ethernet/ interfaces or GE electrical interfaces. The GE
Gigabit Ethernet electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE
interface board electrical interfaces.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet.

EM6TA 6-port RJ45 Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

Ethernet/ l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are
Gigabit Ethernet compatible with the FE electrical interface.
interface board
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet.
l Supports the IEEE 1588v2 feature.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22

Board Board Name Valid Slot

Acronym Description

EM6FA 4-port RJ45 + 2- Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

EG4 2-port RJ45/SFP Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides four GE interfaces, of which two can be
+ 2-port RJ45 RJ45 GE electrical interfaces or SFP GE optical
Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, and the other two can be only RJ45 GE
interface board electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are
compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet.
l Supports the IEEE 1588v2 feature.

EG4P 2-port RJ45/SFP Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides four GE interfaces, of which two can be
+ 2-port RJ45 RJ45 GE electrical interfaces or SFP GE optical
Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, and the other two can be only RJ45 GE
interface board electrical interfaces and support the power over
with the power Ethernet function. The GE electrical interfaces are
supply function compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet.
l Supports the IEEE 1588v2 feature.

EFP8 8-port RJ45 FE Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides eight FE electrical interfaces.

EoPDH l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE
processing interface.
board with the
switching l Supports the processing of EoPDH services.
function l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services
and Layer 2 switching services.
l Supports synchronous Ethernet.

EMS6 4-port RJ45 and Slot 1 to slot 6 l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
2-port SFP FE/ l Uses SFP modules to provide two GE optical
GE EoSDH interfaces or GE electrical interfaces. The GE
processing electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE
board with the electrical interfaces.
switching
function l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE
interface.
l Supports the processing of EoSDH services.
l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services
and Layer 2 switching services.
l Supports synchronous Ethernet.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23

Board Board Name Valid Slot

Acronym Description

ML1 16xE1 (Smart) Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1
tributary board interfaces.
l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.

MD1 32xE1 (Smart) Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1
tributary board interfaces.
l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.

SP3S 16xE1 tributary Slot 1 to slot 14 Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1
board interfaces.

SP3D 32xE1 tributary Slot 1 to slot 14 Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or TDM 120-ohm E1
board interfaces.

AUX Auxiliary Slot 1 to slot 14 Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous
interface board data interface, one synchronous data interface, and four-
input and two-output external alarm interfaces.

PIU Power board slot 26/27 Provides one -48 V/-60 V DC power input.

FAN Fan board slot 28 Cools and ventilates the IDU.

3.3 CSHN
The CSHN is the integrated system control, switching, and timing board.

3.3.1 Version Description

The functional versions of the CSHN are SLB1 and SLB2.

Compared with the SLB1CSHN, the SLB2CSHN incorporates the following functions:

l Multiprotocol label switching transport profile (MPLS-TP) tunnel OAM

l ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets carrying control words
l Virtual private LAN services (VPLSs)

3.3.2 Application
CSHN boards function as system control, switching, and timing boards on OptiX RTN 980 NEs.
In this scenario, these boards also converge and groom various services using their STM-1/4
and GE service ports.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24

Figure 3-4 Application scenario of CSHN boards

E1 Regional backhaul
network
STM-1/4

FE/GE

IF E1/STM-1
Service
board
board FE/GE
CSHN
STM-1/4
IF
board GE

Radio link Cable/Fiber

OptiX RTN 980 OptiX RTN 910/950

NOTE

l In the preceding figure, IF boards can be TDM IF boards, or general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF
boards working in SDH radio mode if they need to converge TDM radio services, and they can be
general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1
+Ethernet mode if they need to converge integrated IP radio services.
l E1 services shown in the preceding figure can be native E1 services or CES/ATM E1 services, and
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or ETH PWE3 services.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Ethernet interface boards, STM-1 interface boards,
E1 interface boards, or Smart E1 processing boards.

3.3.3 Functions and Features

The CSHN provides 22 Gbit/s packet switching, full time-division cross-connection, system
control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHN provides GE ports,
STM-1/4 ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.

Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the CSHN supports.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25

Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CSHN supports

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Switching Supports 22 Gbit/s packet switching function.

capacity

Cross-connect l Supports higher order cross-connections, which are

capacity equivalent to 128x128 VC-4s.
l Supports full time-division lower order cross-
connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the
VC-12 or VC-3 level.

System control Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of

and the IDU, and works as a communication service unit
communication between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to
control and manage the NE.

Clock source Clock source Provides the system clock and frame headers for
service signals and overhead signals for the other
boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.
The traced clock source can be any of the following:
l External clock
l SDH line clock
l PDH tributary clock
l Radio link clock
l Synchronous Ethernet clock

IEEE 1588v2 Processes IEEE 1588v2 messages.

protocol

Clock Supports the following clock protection schemes:

protection l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

External clock 1
port

External time 2
port

DCN Outband DCN Supports a maximum of 24 DCCs.

Inband DCN Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN

bandwidth is configurable.

Network HWECC Supported

management protocol
protocols
IP protocol Supported

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26

Function and Feature Description

L2 DCN Supported

SNMP protocol Supports SNMP Get and Set for managing devices.

Protection 1+1 hot backup Supported

MPLS/PWE3 functions Supported

See Table 3-3.

QoS functions Supported

See Table 3-4.

Ethernet service functions Supported

See Table 3-5.

STM-1/4 service functions Supported

See Table 3-6.

Auxiliary ports NMS port 1

and
management NMS serial port 1
ports NE cascade port 1

Outdoor cabinet 1
monitoring port The specifications of port comply with RS-485.

O&M Warm reset and Supported

cold reset

In-service Supported
FPGA loading

Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

Board power Supported

consumption
information
query

Board Supported
temperature
detection

Board voltage Supported

detection

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27

Function and Feature Description

Detection of Supported
indicators on the
other boards

Hot swapping Supported

function

Pluggable CF Supported
card

The packet switching unit of the CSHN works with its service interface unit or a service board
to implement MPLS/PWE3 functions. Table 3-3 provides details about these functions.

Table 3-3 MPLS/PWE3 functions

Function and Feature Description

MPLS Setup mode Static LSPs

tunnel
VLAN subinterface Supported

Protection 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS

OAM l MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711

l MPLS-TP tunnel OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731 (applicable only to the SLB2CSHN)
l LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions

PWE3 TDM Emulatio l SAToP

PWE3 n mode l CESoPSN

Packet 125 us to 5000 us

loading
time

Jitter l 375 s to 16000 s (for TDM PWE3 services carried

compens on Smart E1 boards)
ation l 875 s to 16000 s (for TDM PWE3 services carried
bufferin on channelized STM-1 boards)
g time

ATM Mapping l ATM N-to-one VCC cell encapsulation

PWE3 mode l ATM N-to-one VPC cell encapsulation
l ATM one-to-one VCC cell encapsulation
l ATM one-to-one VPC cell encapsulation

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28

Function and Feature Description

Transpar Supported
ently
transmitt
ed ATM
service

Maximu 31
m
number
of
concaten
ated cells

ETH Encapsul l Raw mode

PWE3 ation l Tagged mode
mode

Service l E-Line
type l E-Aggr
l E-LAN, that is, virtual private LAN service (VPLS)

Control l The SLB1CSHN supports only packets carrying no

word control word.
l The SLB2CSHN supports both packets carrying no
control word and packets carrying control words.

Setup mode Static PWs

Number of PWs A maximum of 1024 PWs

Protection 1:1 PW APS

OAM l VCCV
l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711
l MPLS-TP PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731 (applicable only to the SLB2CSHN)
l PW ping and PW traceroute functions
l One-click PWE3 service fault diagnosis

MS-PW Supported

Bandwidth setting Supported

The packet switching unit of the CSHN works with its service interface unit or a service board
to implement QoS functions. Table 3-4 provides details about these functions.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29

Table 3-4 QoS functions

Function and Description

Feature

DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service

classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values)
carried by the packets.

Ethernet complex Supports traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs,
traffic classification C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried
by packets.

CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.

Queue scheduling Supports the following queue scheduling policies:

policies l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR

Congestion Supports tail drop and weighted random early detection (WRED).
avoidance

Traffic shaping Supports shaping for a specified port, priority queue, or service flow,
and supports a step of 64 kbit/s for the peak information rate (PIR)
and committed information rate (CIR).

The Ethernet service interface unit of the CSHN works with its packet switching unit to
implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-5 provides details about these functions.

Table 3-5 Ethernet service functions

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Receives/Transmits GE service signals and works with

the packet switching unit to process the received GE
service signals.

Port GE electrical 2
specifications port (fixed):
10/100/1000BA
SE-T(X)

GE port: SFP 2
optical module
(1000BASE-SX
and 1000BASE-
LX)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30

Function and Feature Description

Port attributes Working mode l GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M
full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex and
auto-negotiation.

TAG attribute l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet

port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.

Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum length of 9600

bytes.

Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that

function complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Services E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:

l Port-based E-line services
l VLAN-based E-line services
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs

E-LAN services Supports the following types of E-LAN services:

l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
l E-LAN services carried by PWs, that is, virtual
private LAN services (VPLSs), only supported by
SLB2CSHN boards

LAG Inter-board Supported

LAG

Intra-board Supported
LAG

ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032v1/v2.

Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

IGMP snooping Supported

LPT Supported

Port mirroring Supported

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31

Function and Feature Description

LLDP Supported

ETH OAM Ethernet service l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

OAM function.
l Supports packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring functions that comply with ITU-T Y.
1731.

Ethernet port Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM

OAM function.

RMON Supported

Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet (not supported by SFP electrical

modules)

Clock Supports the following clock protection schemes:

protection l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN Inband DCN Each GE port provides one inband DCN channel.

OAM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports

Warm reset Supported

Query of SFP Supported

module
information

Table 3-6 provides details about the STM-1/4 service functions that the CSHN supports.

Table 3-6 STM-1/4 service functions

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1/4 signals.

Service categories l STM-1

l STM-4

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32

Function and Feature Description

Port specifications l STM-1: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and STM-1e

l STM-4: S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2
l The performance characteristics of the ports comply
with ITU-T G.957 and the jitter performance of the
ports complies with ITU-T G.823.

DCN Outband DCN Supported

Protection Linear Supported

multiplex
section
protection
(MSP)

Ring MSP Supported

SNCP Supported

Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

Clock Supports the following clock protection schemes:

protection l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

O&M Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths
l Inloops and outloops at STM-1/4 optical ports

Cold reset and Supported

warm reset

Setting of the Supported

on/off state for a
laser

ALS functiona Supported

Query of SFP Supported

optical module
information

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33

NOTE

a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:

l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

3.3.4 Working Principle

The CSHN consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-
connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the CSHN

Backplane

GE bus GE bus Ethernet service

GE signal GE signal Packet
switching unit board/Packet switching
access unit unit of the paired board

VC-4
signal Cross- VC-4 signal TDM service
STM-1/4 signal STM-1/4 signal
connect unit unit/Cross-connect unit
processing unit
of the paired board

Control bus

Ethernet NM port Clock signal received

NM serial port from other boards
System control and Clock unit
Clock signal provided
communication unit to other boards
NE cascading port
System control and
FE signal communication unit

Clock signal
Clock signal
received from
provided to
the service
the other units
unit on the
on the board
board
Clock/Time External clock signal
port
Power -48 V 1
3.3 V power supplied to the supply
other units on the board unit -48 V 2

System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34

l The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
l The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
l The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
l The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet
service packets.
l The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the
control bus.
l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
l The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l The system control and communication unit on a CSHN board communicates with the
system control and communication unit on the paired CSHN board by carrying FE signals
over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between
paired boards is achieved.

Packet Switching Unit

The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services
(including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet).

l After receiving services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or a service board,
the packet switching unit grooms the services based on the configurations that are delivered
by the system control and communication unit.
l After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or a service
board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and
communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and
communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The
packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit or the
service board.
l The packet switching unit exchanges data service signals with the packet switching unit of
the paired board over the GE pass-through bus.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35

Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order cross-
connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-6 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.

Figure 3-6 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit

Source TDM SinkTDM

service unit service unit
Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC

Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

The cross-connect unit exchanges TDM service signals with the cross-connect unit of the paired
board over the TDM pass-through bus.

GE Signal Access Unit

The GE signal access unit allows access of two GE optical signals or two GE electrical signals
and works with the Layer 2 switching unit to provide Ethernet service processing functions.

l In the receive direction: After performing O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, and
serial/parallel conversion for GE optical signals or after performing restructuring, decoding,
and serial/parallel conversion for GE electrical signals, the GE signal access unit extracts
framed GE signals by delimiting frames and adding preambles. The GE signal access unit
also performs CRC checks and Ethernet performance measurement.
l In the transmit direction: After delimiting frames, adding preambles, calculating CRC
codes, and measuring Ethernet performance, the GE signal access unit performs parallel/
serial conversion and encoding and then transmits GE signals to the GE electrical port or
the GE optical port after performing E/O conversion.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36

STM-1/4 Signal Processing Unit

The STM-1/4 signal processing unit transmits/receives and processes two STM-1/4 signals,
extracts clock signals, restores data, scrambles/descrambles data, processes overheads, and
processes pointers.

l In the receive direction, the STM-1/4 signal processing unit performs the following
functions:
Regenerates STM-1/4 signals and performs O/E conversion.
Restores and descrambles clock data.
Extracts and processes overhead bytes, adjusts AU pointer, and sends pointer indication
signals and VC-4 signal to the cross-connect unit.
l In the transmit direction, the STM-1/4 signal processing unit performs the following
functions:
Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit and
processes clock signals.
Sets AU pointers and overhead bytes.
Scrambles signals and performs E/O conversion.

Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock
sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the
phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals
and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the
other boards.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit combines and then converts the -48 V power inputs into the power supply
required by the chips of the other units on the local board.

3.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, buttons, service ports, latches, clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management
ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-7 Front panel of the CSHN

1 2 GE1
CSHN

TX RX
PROG
SYNC

LINK1

LINK2
STAT

ACT1

ACT2
LOS1
LOS2

CRIT
ACT
SRV

MAJ
MIN

1 2 1 2
GE SYS STM-1/4 GE
CF RCV RST LAMP NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 MON/TOD2 GE2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1. Indicators 2. Buttons 3. Clock ports, auxiliary

ports, and management ports

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37

4. STM-1/4 optical ports 5. GE optical service ports 6. GE electrical service ports

(using SFP optical modules) (using SFP optical modules) (fixed)

7. Latches - -

Indicators

Table 3-7 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.

PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board
100 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

On (green) l When the board is being powered on

or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at The BOOTROM self-check fails during

100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38

Indicator State Meaning

On (red) l The memory self-check fails or

loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
l When database synchronization
between the active and standby
system control boards fails, the
PROG indicator on the standby
system control board is steady red.

SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.

On (red) The clock source is lost or a clock

switchover occurs.

SRV On (green) The system is working properly.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

system.

ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the active one.
In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.

Off In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the standby one.
In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical port on the line is

reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical port on the line is free of

R_LOS alarms.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical port on the line is

reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical port on the line is free

of R_LOS alarms.

LINK1 On (green) The connection at the GE1 port is

working properly.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39

Indicator State Meaning

Off The connection at the GE1 port is

interrupted.

ACT1 On or blinking (yellow) Data is being transmitted or received at

the GE1 port.

Off No data is being transmitted or received

at the GE1 port.

LINK2 On (green) The connection at the GE2 port is

working properly.

Off The connection at the GE2 port is

interrupted.

ACT2 On or blinking (yellow) Data is being transmitted or received at

the GE2 port.

Off No data is being transmitted or received

at the GE2 port.

CRIT On (red) A critical alarm occurs on the NE.

MAJ On (orange) A major alarm occurs on the NE.

MIN On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the NE.

Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports

Table 3-8 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports

Port Description Connector Type

NMS/COM Ethernet NM port/NM serial port

EXT NE cascading port

CLK/TOD1 External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz), RJ45

external time port 1, or wayside E1 port

MON/TOD2 Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet/External

time port 2

NOTE

l The external clock port, external time port, and wayside E1 port share one physical port. This port can
also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data
overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time.
l External time port 2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. This port,
however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40

Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-8 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.

Figure 3-8 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port

Port Pin Signal

1 Transmitting data (+)

2 Transmitting data (-)

3 Receiving data (+)

4 Grounding end of the NM serial port

NMS/COM
5 Receive end of the NM serial port

6 Receiving data (-)

7 Not defined

8 Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 3-10 Pin assignments for the EXT port

Port Pin Signal

1 Transmitting data (+)

2 Transmitting data (-)

EXT 3 Receiving data (+)

6 Receiving data (-)

4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined

NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-11 provides status explanation for these
indicators.

Table 3-11 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector

Indicator State Meaning

LINK (green) On The link is working properly.

Off The link is interrupted.

ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is transmitting or receiving

data.

Off The port is not transmitting or

receiving data.

NOTE

The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed, causing broadcast storms on the network and affecting DCN communication.

Figure 3-9 shows the two common incorrect connections.

Figure 3-9 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port

1 2 GE1
CSHN

TX RX
PROG
SYNC

LINK1

LINK2
STAT

ACT1

ACT2
LOS1
LOS2

CRIT
ACT
SRV

MAJ
MIN

1 2 1 2
GE SYS STM-1/4 GE
CF RCV RST LAMP NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 MON/TOD2 GE2

LAN

1 2 GE1
CSHN

TX RX
PROG
SYNC

LINK1

LINK2
STAT

ACT1

ACT2
LOS1
LOS2

CRIT
ACT
SRV

MAJ
MIN

1 2 1 2
GE SYS STM-1/4 GE
CF RCV RST LAMP NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 MON/TOD2 GE2

The clock port (CLK) and the high-precision time port (TOD1) use different pins of the same
RJ45 connector. The pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port are provided in Table 3-12. The
CLK/TOD1 port can work only in one mode at one time and does not support two or more modes
at the same time.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42

Table 3-12 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port

Pin Working Mode

External External External External External

Clock Time Time Time Input Time
Input Output (DCLS) Output
(1PPS + (1PPS + (DCLS)
Time Time
Informati Information
on) )

1 Signal input Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
(-)

2 Signal input Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
(+)

3 Not defined 1PPS signal 1PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time
input (-) output (-) signal input signal output
(RS-422 (RS-422 (-) (-)
level) level) (RS-422 (RS-422
level) level)

4 Signal output Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding

(-) end end end end

5 Signal output Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding

(+) end end end end

6 Not defined 1PPS signal 1PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time
input (+) output (+) signal input signal output
(RS-422 (RS-422 (+) (+)
level) level) (RS-422 (RS-422
level) level)

7 Not defined Time Time Not defined Not defined

information information
input (-) output (-)
(RS-422 (RS-422
level) level)

8 Not defined Time Time Not defined Not defined

information information
input (+) output (+)
(RS-422 (RS-422
level) level)

NOTE
The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that
when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a clock port.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43

The time port, and port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet share the MON/TOD2 port physically.
The pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port are provided in Table 3-13.

Table 3-13 Pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port

Pin Working Mode

External External External External Port for

Time Time Time Input Time Monitoring
Input Output (DCLS) Output an Outdoor
(1PPS + (1PPS + (DCLS) Cabinet
Time Time
Informati Information
on) )

1 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

2 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

3 1PPS signal 1PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time Outdoor

input (-) output (-) signal input signal output cabinet
(RS-422 (RS-422 (-) (-) monitoring
level) level) (RS-422 (RS-422 signal input (-)
level) level) (RS-422
level)

4 Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding

end end end end end

5 Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding

end end end end end

6 1PPS signal 1PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time Outdoor

input (+) output (+) signal input signal output cabinet
(RS-422 (RS-422 (+) (+) monitoring
level) level) (RS-422 (RS-422 signal input
level) level) (+)
(RS-422
level)

7 Time Time Not defined Not defined Outdoor

information information cabinet
input (-) output (-) monitoring
(RS-422 (RS-422 signal output
level) level) (-)
(RS-422
level)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44

Pin Working Mode

External External External External Port for

Time Time Time Input Time Monitoring
Input Output (DCLS) Output an Outdoor
(1PPS + (1PPS + (DCLS) Cabinet
Time Time
Informati Information
on) )

8 Time Time Not defined Not defined Outdoor

information information cabinet
input (+) output (+) monitoring
(RS-422 (RS-422 signal output
level) level) (+)
(RS-422
level)

Buttons

Table 3-14 Buttons

Button Name Description

CF RCV CF configuration restoration After this button is pressed and held for
button 8 seconds, the board automatically
restores the NE database from the CF
card.

RST Warm reset button After this button is pressed, a warm

reset is performed on the board.

LAMP Indicator test button After this button is pressed, the

indicators on all the boards of the NE
become on.

Latches
There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board,
you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition,
rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/
protection switching.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45

Service Ports

Table 3-15 Description of the service ports on the CSHN

Port Description Connector Type

2xSTM-1 STM-1/4 optical port LC SFP optical module

2xGE GE optical port LC SFP optical module

2xGE GE electrical ports (fixed) RJ45

NOTE

l The four GE ports share two GE channels. That is, the GE1 ports share one GE channel and the GE2
ports share the other GE channel. Only one of the two ports that share one GE channel can transmit/
receive services at one time.
l On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively.

SFP optical modules are used to provide GE optical ports and STM-1/4 optical ports; one SFP
optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-10, in which
TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port.

Figure 3-10 Ports of the SFP optical module

TX RX

The GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Table 3-16
and Table 3-17 provide the pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in different modes.

Table 3-16 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode

Pin 1000BASE-T

Signal Function

1 BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A (+)

2 BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A (-)

3 BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B (+)

4 BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C (+)

5 BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C (-)

6 BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B (-)

7 BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D (+)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46

Pin 1000BASE-T

Signal Function

8 BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D (-)

Table 3-17 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode

Pin 1000BASE-T

Signal Function

1 BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B (+)

2 BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B (-)

3 BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A (+)

4 BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D (+)

5 BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D (-)

6 BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A (-)

7 BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C (+)

8 BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C (-)

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. The status explanation for the two indicators is the same
as that for the indicators on the RJ45 connector of the NMS/COM port.

3.3.6 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable compact flash (CF) card.

NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system
control, switching, and timing board and hold it for 8 seconds, the data stored on the CF card
will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs
on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.

NOTE

The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and
timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations
are not needed to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and
the CF card. If the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software
packages or data, the SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47

Figure 3-11 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

1 2 3 4

ON DIP
1

1. DIP switches 2. CF card

Table 3-18 Setting DIP switches

Setting of DIP Switchesa Meaning

1 2 3 4

0 0 0 0 Indicates that the board works with the

watchdog enabled.

0 0 0 1 Indicates that the board is being debugged.

0 0 1 0 Indicates that the board is being debugged.

0 0 1 1 Indicates that the board is being debugged.

0 1 0 0 Indicates that the board works with the

watchdog disabled and a full memory check
is running.

0 1 0 1 Indicates the BIOS holdover state.

0 1 1 0 Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.

0 1 1 1 The value is reserved.

1 0 0 0 The value is reserved.

1 0 0 1 The value is reserved.

1 0 1 0 Erases data in the system parameter area.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48

Setting of DIP Switchesa Meaning

1 2 3 4

1 0 1 1 Erases databases.b

1 1 0 0 Erases NE software including patches.

1 1 0 1 Erases databases and NE software including

patches.

1 1 1 0 Erases all data in the file system.

1 1 1 1 Erases all the data except for board

manufacturing information and basic BIOS.

NOTE

l a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents the binary digit 1.
When a DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents the binary digit 0.
l b: Remove the CF card before you use DIP switches to delete databases.

3.3.7 Valid Slots

The CSHN can be inserted in slots 15 and 20. For the NMS to manage function units on the
CSHN, the function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical
slots on the NMS.

Figure 3-12 Slots for the CSHN in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EXT) Slot 14 (EXT)

Slot 11 (EXT) Slot 12 (EXT)

Slot 9 (EXT) Slot 10 (EXT)

Slot 28 Slot 20 (CSHN)

(FAN)
Slot 7 (EXT) Slot 8 (EXT)

Slot 15 (CSHN)

Slot 5 (EXT) Slot 6 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 1 (EXT) Slot 2 (EXT)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49

Figure 3-13 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHN

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EXT) Slot 14 (EXT)

Slot 11 (EXT) Slot 12 (EXT)

Slot 9 (EXT) Slot 10 (EXT)

Slot 28 Slot 20 (CSHN) Slot 21 (SL4D) Slot 22 (EG2D)

(FAN)
Slot 7 (EXT) Slot 8 (EXT)

Slot 15 (CSHN) Slot 16 (SL4D) Slot 17 (EG2D)

Slot 5 (EXT) Slot 6 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 1 (EXT) Slot 2 (EXT)

Table 3-19 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slot 15 > Slot 20

3.3.8 Types of SFP Modules

The GE port and STM-1/4 optical port on the CSHN board support multiple types of SFP
modules.

Table 3-20 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports

Part Number Type

34060286 1000BASE-SX

34060473 1000BASE-LX

Table 3-21 Types of SFP modules that the STM-1/4 optical port supports

Part Number Type

34060287 Ie-1

34060276 S-1.1

34060281 L-1.1

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50

Part Number Type

34060282 L-1.2

34100104 STM-1e

34060277 S-4.1

34060280 L-4.1

34060284 L-4.2

3.3.9 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, cross-
connection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, STM-1/4 ports, clocks, and wayside
service port, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Packet Switching Capacity

The CSHN supports a 22 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.

Cross-Connection Capability
l Supports higher order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 128x128 VC-4s.
l Supports lower order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.

Ethernet Port Performance

Ethernet port performance complies with IEEE 802.3. The following tables provide the
specifications of GE optical ports, and GE electrical ports.

Table 3-22 GE optical interface performance(two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance

transmission)

Item Performance

Classification code 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 1000BASE-LX (10 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm) 850 1310

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000

Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode

Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Average optical output -9 to -3 -9 to -3

power (dBm)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51

Item Performance

Classification code 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 1000BASE-LX (10 km)

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -17 -20

Overload (dBm) 0 -3

Extinction ratio (dB) 9.5 9.5

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Table 3-23 GE electrical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ45

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.

Table 3-24 STM-1 optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

fiber fiber fiber fiber

Transmission distance 2 15 40 80
(km)

Operating wavelength 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
(nm)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52

Item Performance

Mean launched power -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)

Receiver minimum -30 -28 -34 -34

sensitivity (dBm)

Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Minimum extinction ratio 10 8.2 10 10

(dB)

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of
SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.

Table 3-25 STM-1 electrical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

Code type CMI

Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair

transmission direction

Impedance (ohm) 75

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.

STM-4 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-4 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The following
table provides the typical performance of the interface.

Table 3-26 STM-4 optical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 622080

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53

Item Performance

Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2

Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

fiber fiber fiber

Transmission distance (km) 15 40 80

Operating wavelength (nm) 1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm) -15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2

Minimum receiver sensitivity -28 -28 -28

(dBm)

Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8 -8

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types
of SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission
distances.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.

Table 3-27 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Item Performance

External synchronization 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz
source (compliant with ITU-T G.703 13)

Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in and pull-out ranges

Noise generation

Noise tolerance

Noise transfer

Transient response and

holdover performance

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-28 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D) 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm

Weight 1.60 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 36.6 W

3.4 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.4.1 Version Description

The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.

3.4.2 Application
IF1 boards function as TDM IF boards to transmit TDM services on OptiX RTN 980 NEs
building TDM radio networks.

Figure 3-14 Application scenario of IF1 boards

IF1 CSHN IF1

TDM radio network

E1/STM-1 TDM TDM

service IF1 IF1 service E1/STM-1
board CSHN CSHN board
STM-1/STM-4
STM-1/STM-4

OptiX RTN 980

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55

NOTE

l IF1 boards transmit PDH radio services or 1xSTM-1 SDH radio services.
l If a TDM radio network needs to transmit a small number of FE/GE services, these services must be
encapsulated into TDM services by EMS6/EFP8 boards before being transmitted.
l TDM service boards shown in the preceding figure can be E1 interface boards or STM-1 interface
boards.

3.4.3 Functions and Features

The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Table 3-29 lists the functions and features that the IF1 supports.

Table 3-29 Functions and features that the IF1 supports

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions l Receives and transmits one IF signal.

l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Radio type TU/STM-1-based radio

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IF1.

ATPC Supported

Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

SD protection

N+1 protection Supported

SNCP Supported

License Supports control on the air interface capacity by using

the license file.

K byte pass-through Supported

Clock Clock source Clock at the air interface

Clock Supports the following clock protection schemes:

protection l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol (supported
only in SDH radio mode)
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
(supported only in SDH radio mode)

DCN Inband DCN Not supported

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56

Function and Feature Description

Outband DCN l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of one DCC byte if the capacity is less
than 16xE1.
l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes if the capacity is
equal to or more than 16xE1.
l The SDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.

OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops at IF ports
l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite ports

Warm reset and Supported

cold reset

In-service Supported
FPGA loading

Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

Board power Supported

consumption
information
query

Board Supported
temperature
detection

Board power Supported

detection

3.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the IF1.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-15 Functional block diagram of the IF1

Backplane

SMODEM HSM signal bus

unit Paired board

ODU control signal

Logic processing unit

Service bus

MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing
Cross-connect unit
Combiner
Interface

IF
Microwave MODEM
unit

unit

frame signal unit Overhead bus

System control and
communication unit

Control bus System control and

communication unit

Logic
control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU Power -48 V

+3.3 V power supplied to the other supply
units on the board unit +3.3 V

Clock signal provided to the Clock

other units on the board unit System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-30 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Combiner interface Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
unit and microwave service signals.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates ODU control signals.

l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of service signals through the

automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.
l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Synchronizes frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF

(for SDH microwave alarms.
signal processing) l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks link IDs and generates specific alarms.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes, and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Extracts wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/
s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead
signal to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals
to the logic processing unit.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in PDH radio mode

(for PDH microwave and generates specific alarms and performance events.
signal processing) l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages in PDH radio mode and reports
the changes to the system control and communication
unit over the control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames in PDH radio mode and transmits
the overhead signals to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts TU pointers.
l Maps TU-12s in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode to the specific positions in VC-4s.

6 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and
communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-31 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Demultiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals from 8 Mbit/
s overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Sets higher order path overheads.

(for SDH microwave l Sets AU pointers.
signal processing)
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.

MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signals.

(for PDH microwave l Sets the microwave frame overheads in PDH radio
signal processing) mode.

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.

6 Combiner interface Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service

unit signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:

l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DC-
DC conversion.
l Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61

3.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-16 Front panel of the IF1

ODU-PWR
IF1

IF1
WARNING
IF

STAT
I O

ODU
LINK

RMT
-48V OUTPUT

ACT
SRV
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL

Indicators

Table 3-32 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.

On (red) l The ODU is reporting

critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor

alarms.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62

Indicator State Meaning

Blinks on (yellow) and off at The antennas are not aligned.

300 ms intervals

Off The ODU is offline.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is

reporting defects.

Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.

Off l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Ports

Table 3-33 Description of the Ports

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding

Cable

IF IF port TNC IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63

The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.

The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.4.6 Valid Slots

The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as
the physical slots.

Figure 3-17 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (IF1) Slot 14 (IF1)

Slot 11 (IF1) Slot 12 (IF1)

Slot 9 (IF1) Slot 10 (IF1)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (IF1) Slot 8 (IF1)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (IF1) Slot 6 (IF1)

Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 4 (IF1)

Slot 1 (IF1) Slot 2 (IF1)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 50.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64

Figure 3-18 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS

Slot 63 (ODU) Slot 64 (ODU)

Slot 61 (ODU) Slot 62 (ODU)

Slot 59 (ODU) Slot 60 (ODU)

Slot 57 (ODU) Slot 58 (ODU)

Slot 55 (ODU) Slot 56 (ODU)

Slot 53 (ODU) Slot 54 (ODU)

Slot 51 (ODU) Slot 52 (ODU)

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (IF1) Slot 14 (IF1)

Slot 11 (IF1) Slot 12 (IF1)

Slot 9 (IF1) Slot 10 (IF1)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (IF1) Slot 8 (IF1)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (IF1) Slot 6 (IF1)

Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 4 (IF1)

Slot 1 (IF1) Slot 2 (IF1)

Table 3-34 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 8 and 10 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots
12 and 14 > Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and
2

Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically,
slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, slots 4 and 6, slots 7 and 9, slots 8 and 10, slots 11 and 13, and slots
12 and 14 are paired slots respectively.

3.4.7 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65

Radio Work Modes

NOTE

The channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 980 comply with ETSI standards. Channel spacings 14/28/56
MHz apply to most frequency bands; but channel spacings 13.75/27.5/55 MHz apply to the 18 GHz frequency
band.

Table 3-35 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

4xE1 QPSK 7

4xE1 16QAM 3.5

8xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)

8xE1 16QAM 7

16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)

16xE1 16QAM 14 (13.75)

22xE1 32QAM 14 (13.75)

26xE1 64QAM 14 (13.75)

35xE1 16QAM 28 (27.5)

44xE1 32QAM 28 (27.5)

53xE1 64QAM 28 (27.5)

STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

IF Performance

Table 3-36 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140

ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme ASK

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 10

Interface impedance (ohm) 50

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-37 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals

l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH microwave signals

Adaptive time- Supported

domain equalizer for
baseband signals

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-38 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D) 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight 0.72 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W

3.5 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.

3.5.1 Version Description

The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

3.5.2 Application
IFU2 boards apply to OptiX RTN 980 NEs to transmit native E1 services, native Ethernet
services, native MPLS/PWE3 services, or a combination of these services over Integrated IP
radio (native E1+Ethernet).

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67

Figure 3-19 Application scenario of IFU2 boards

IFU2 CSHN IFU2

IP radio network

E1
E1
Service Service
FE/GE board IFU2 IFU2 board
CSHN CSHN FE/GE
GE
GE

OptiX RTN 980

NOTE

l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, E1 services can be native E1 services
or CES/ATM E1 services, and Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or ETH PWE3 services.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Ethernet interface boards, E1 interface boards, or
Smart E1 processing boards.

3.5.3 Functions and Features

The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Table 3-39 lists the functions and features that the IFU2 supports. The IFU2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.

Table 3-39 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions l Receives and transmits one IF signal.

l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68

Function and Feature Description

Radio type Integrated IP radio

NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.

Service categories Native E1 + Ethernet

NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s

AM Supported

ATPC Supported

E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native

TDM services being E1 services

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IFU2.

Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

SD protection

N+1 protection Supported

SNCP for TDM Supported

services

License Air interface Supported

capacity license

AM license Supported

Clock at the Clock source Clock at the air interface

physical layer
Clock Supports the following clock protection schemes:
protection l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2 Time Supported

clock synchronization

Frequency Not supported

synchronization

PTP port l When an NE using an IFU2 board works in OC or

BC mode, the IF port on the IFU2 board can function
as a PTP port.
l When an NE using an IFU2 board works in TC+BC
mode, the IF port on the IFU2 board can function as
a PTP port whose port type is BC.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69

Function and Feature Description

DCN Inband DCN Supported.

The DCN bandwidth is configurable.

Outband DCN Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes.

Ethernet service functions See Table 3-40.

MPLS functions See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided

in the section for the system control, switching, and
PWE3 functions timing board.

O&M Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.

Cold reset and Supported

warm reset

In-service Supported
FPGA loading

PRBS BER test Supported

at IF ports

Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

Board power Supported

consumption
information
query

Board Supported
temperature
detection

Board power Supported

detection

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70

Table 3-40 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports

Function and Feature Description

Services Native Ethernet l E-Line services

services Port-based E-line services
VLAN-based E-line services
E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-LAN services
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

PWE3 Ethernet l E-Line services carried by PWs

services l E-Aggr services carried by PWs
l E-LAN services carried by PWs, that is, virtual
private LAN services (VPLSs), supported only
when the system control, switching, and timing
board is an SLB2CSHN board

ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032 v1/v2.

OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring functions that comply with ITU-T Y.
1731.

LAG Supported

Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

IGMP snooping Supported

QoS See the description of QoS functions provided in the

section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.

RMON Supported

3.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-20 Functional block diagram of the IFU2

Backplane

SMODEM
HSM signal bus
unit
Paired board

ODU control signal

Service bus
Cross-connect unit

processing
Logic
Overhead bus

unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing
interface unit

System control and

Combiner

IF Microwave frame MODEM communication unit

unit

signal unit

Ethernet GE bus
processing Packet switching unit
unit

Control bus
System control and
communication unit

Logic
control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU -48 V1

Power
+3.3 V power supplied to the other supply
units on the board unit -48 V2

+3.3 V power supplied to the

+3.3 V
monitoring circuit

Clock signal provided to the Clock

other units on the board System clock signal
unit

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-41 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Combiner interface Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
unit and microwave service signals.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates ODU control signals.

l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Filters signals.

l Performs A/D conversion.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP

radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM bytes, and DCC
bytes in microwave frames and transmits the overhead
signals to the logic processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

6 Ethernet processing l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.

7 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.

NOTE

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-42 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

2 Ethernet processing l Receives GE signal from the packet switching unit.

unit l Processes GE signals.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.

l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP
radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.

4 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

5 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.

6 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.

7 Combiner interface Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service

unit signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74

l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DC-
DC conversion.
l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-21 Front panel of the IFU2

ODU-PWR
IFU2

IFU2
WARNING
IF

STAT
I O

LINK
ODU
RMT
-48V OUTPUT

ACT
SRV
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL

Indicators

Table 3-43 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

services.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75

Indicator State Meaning

ODU On (green) The ODU is working properly.

On (red) l The ODU is reporting critical or major

alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) The antennas are not aligned.

and off at 300 ms
intervals

Off The ODU is offline.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is reporting defects.

Off The remote equipment is free of defects.

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the active one.
l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.

Off l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the standby one.
l In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.

Ports

Table 3-44 Description of the Ports

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding

Cable

IF IF port TNC IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

NOTE

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.

The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.5.6 Valid Slots

The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.

Figure 3-22 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (IFU2) Slot 14 (IFU2)

Slot 11 (IFU2) Slot 12 (IFU2)

Slot 9 (IFU2) Slot 10 (IFU2)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (IFU2) Slot 8 (IFU2)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (IFU2) Slot 6 (IFU2)

Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 4 (IFU2)

Slot 1 (IFU2) Slot 2 (IFU2)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77

Figure 3-23 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS

Slot 63 (ODU) Slot 64 (ODU)

Slot 61 (ODU) Slot 62 (ODU)

Slot 59 (ODU) Slot 60 (ODU)

Slot 57 (ODU) Slot 58 (ODU)

Slot 55 (ODU) Slot 56 (ODU)

Slot 53 (ODU) Slot 54 (ODU)

Slot 51 (ODU) Slot 52 (ODU)

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (IFU2) Slot 14 (IFU2)

Slot 11 (IFU2) Slot 12 (IFU2)

Slot 9 (IFU2) Slot 10 (IFU2)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (IFU2) Slot 8 (IFU2)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (IFU2) Slot 6 (IFU2)

Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 4 (IFU2)

Slot 1 (IFU2) Slot 2 (IFU2)

Table 3-45 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 8 and 10 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots
12 and 14 > Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and
2

3.5.7 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78

Radio Work Modes

NOTE

Table 3-46 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board)

Channel Spacing Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet

(MHz) Scheme Number of E1s in Throughput
Hybrid (Mbit/s)
Microwave

7 QPSK 5 9 to 12

7 16QAM 10 20 to 24

7 32QAM 12 24 to 29

7 64QAM 15 31 to 37

7 128QAM 18 37 to 44

7 256QAM 21 43 to 51

14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 23

14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 48

14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 50 to 59

14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 76

14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 77 to 90

14 (13.75) 256QAM 43 90 to 104

28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 48

28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 97

28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 108 to 125

28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 130 to 150

28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 180

28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 180 to 210

56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 97

56 (55) 16QAM 75 165 to 190

56 (55) 32QAM 75 208 to 240

56 (55) 64QAM 75 260 to 310

56 (55) 128QAM 75 310 to 360

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79

Channel Spacing Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet

(MHz) Scheme Number of E1s in Throughput
Hybrid (Mbit/s)
Microwave

56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 420

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.

IF Performance

Table 3-47 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140

ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme ASK

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 10

Interface impedance (ohm) 50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-48 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode LDPC encoding

Adaptive time- Supported

domain equalizer for
baseband signals

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

x D)

Weight 0.79 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 23 W

3.6 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.6.1 Version Description

The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

3.6.2 Application
IFX2 boards form XPIC workgroups to expand the capacity of an Integrated IP radio hop (native
E1+Ethernet) when transmitting native E1 services, native Ethernet services, native MPLS/
PWE3 services, or a combination of these services.

Figure 3-24 Application scenario of IFX2 boards

E1
E1
Service IFX2 IFX2 Service
FE/GE board board
FE/GE
CSHN XPIC cable XPIC cable CSHN
GE
GE
IFX2 IFX2

OptiX RTN 980

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81

NOTE

3.6.3 Functions and Features

The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals.

Table 3-50 lists the functions and features that the IFX2 supports.

Table 3-50 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions l Receives and transmits one IF signal.

l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Radio type Integrated IP radio

NOTE
Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet
radio.

Service categories Native E1 + Ethernet

NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s

AM Supported

ATPC Supported

E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode, in which

native TDM services are E1 services

XPIC Supported

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IFX2.

Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

SD protection

N+1 protection Supported

SNCP for TDM Supported

services

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82

Function and Feature Description

License Air interface Supported

capacity license

AM license Supported

Clock at the Clock source Clock at an air interface

IEEE 1588v2 Time Supported

synchronization

Frequency Not supported

synchronization

PTP port l When an NE using an IFX2 board works in OC or

BC mode, the IF port on the IFX2 board can
function as a PTP port.
l When an NE using an IFX2 board works in TC+BC
mode, the IF port on the IFX2 board can function
as a PTP port whose port type is BC.

DCN Inband DCN Supported.

The DCN bandwidth is configurable.

Outband DCN Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes.

Ethernet service features See Table 3-51.

MPLS functions See the description of the MPLS/PWE3 functions that

the system control, switching, and timing board
PWE3 functions supports.

O&M Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.

Cold reset and Supported

warm reset

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83

Function and Feature Description

In-service Supported
FPGA loading

PRBS BER test Supported

at IF ports

Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

Board power Supported

consumption
information
query

Board Supported
temperature
detection

Board voltage Supported

detection

Table 3-51 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports

Function and Feature Description

Services Native Ethernet l E-Line services

PWE3 Ethernet l E-Line services carried by PWs

ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032 v1/v2.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84

Function and Feature Description

ETH-OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring functions that comply with ITU-T Y.
1731.

LAG Supported

Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

IGMP snooping Supported

QoS See the description of the QoS functions that the system
control, switching, and timing board supports.

RMON Supported

3.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-25 Functional block diagram of the IFX2

Backplane

SMODEM
HSM signal bus
unit
Paired board

ODU control signal Service bus

processing
Cross-connect unit

Logic
MUX/DEMUX unit

unit
System control and

processing
Combiner
interface

IF communication unit
Microwave MODEM Overhead
unit

unit

IF
frame signal unit bus
Ethernet GE bus
processing Packet switching unit
unit
Paired XPIC XPIC signal
board
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU Power -48 V1

supply
+3.3 V power supplied to the
unit -48 V2
other units on the board
+3.3 V power supplied to
+3.3 V
the monitoring circuit

Clock signal provided to the Clock

System clock signal
other units on the board unit

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-52 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Combiner interface Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
unit and microwave service signals.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates ODU control signals.

l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

3 IF processing unit l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two
channels of signals.
Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired IFX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF

signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP

radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM
bytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode
and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits to
the Ethernet processing unit.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

6 Ethernet processing l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.

7 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.

NOTE

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-53 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

2 Ethernet processing l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.

unit l Processes GE signals.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.

l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP
radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.

4 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

5 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

6 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.

7 Combiner interface Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service

unit signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:

l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DC-
DC conversion.
l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-26 Front panel of the IFX2

ODU-PWR
IFX2

IFX2

WARNING
IF
STAT
XPIC

I O
LINK
ODU
RMT

-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV

TURN OFF POWER BEFORE

DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL X-IN X-OUT

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89

Indicators

Table 3-54 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2

Indicator State Meaning

XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is

normal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function is

disabled.

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.

On (red) l The ODU is reporting

critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor

alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at The antennas are not aligned.

300 ms intervals

Off The ODU is offline.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is

reporting defects.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90

Indicator State Meaning

Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.

Off l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Ports

Table 3-55 Description of the ports

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding

Cable

IF IF port TNC IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

X-IN XPIC signal input SMA XPIC cable

port

X-OUT XPIC signal output SMA

port

NOTE

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.

The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.6.6 Valid Slots

The IFX2 can be inserted in slot 1-14. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.

Figure 3-27 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (IFX2) Slot 14 (IFX2)

Slot 11 (IFX2) Slot 12 (IFX2)

Slot 9 (IFX2) Slot 10 (IFX2)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (IFX2) Slot 8 (IFX2)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (IFX2) Slot 6 (IFX2)

Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 4 (IFX2)

Slot 1 (IFX2) Slot 2 (IFX2)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92

Figure 3-28 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2

Slot 63 (ODU) Slot 64 (ODU)

Slot 61 (ODU) Slot 62 (ODU)

Slot 59 (ODU) Slot 60 (ODU)

Slot 57 (ODU) Slot 58 (ODU)

Slot 55 (ODU) Slot 56 (ODU)

Slot 53 (ODU) Slot 54 (ODU)

Slot 51 (ODU) Slot 52 (ODU)

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (IFX2) Slot 14 (IFX2)

Slot 11 (IFX2) Slot 12 (IFX2)

Slot 9 (IFX2) Slot 10 (IFX2)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (IFX2) Slot 8 (IFX2)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (IFX2) Slot 6 (IFX2)

Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 4 (IFX2)

Slot 1 (IFX2) Slot 2 (IFX2)

Table 3-56 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 8 and 10 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots
12 and 14 > Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and
2

One IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.

3.6.7 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93

Radio Work Modes

NOTE

Table 3-57 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board)

Channel Spacing Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet

(MHz) Scheme Number of E1s in Throughput
Hybrid (Mbit/s)
Microwave

7 QPSK 4 9 to 11

7 16QAM 9 19 to 23

7 32QAM 11 24 to 29

7 64QAMa 14 31 to 36

14 (13.75) QPSK 9 20 to 23

14 (13.75) 16QAM 19 40 to 47

14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 50 to 59

14 (13.75) 64QAM 30 63 to 73

14 (13.75) 128QAMa 36 75 to 88

28 (27.5) QPSK 19 41 to 48

28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 84 to 97

28 (27.5) 32QAM 49 103 to 120

28 (27.5) 64QAM 63 130 to 150

28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 180

28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 180 to 210

56 (55) QPSK 39 83 to 97

56 (55) 16QAM 75 165 to 190

56 (55) 32QAM 75 210 to 245

56 (55) 64QAM 75 260 to 305

56 (55) 128QAM 75 310 to 360

56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 410

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94

Channel Spacing Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet

(MHz) Scheme Number of E1s in Throughput
Hybrid (Mbit/s)
Microwave
NOTE
For the IFX2 board, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC function is
enabled or disabled.
When the channel spacing is 7 MHz or 14 MHz and the XPIC function is enabled, the IFX2 board only
supports the XMC-2 ODU.
a: When the XPIC function is enabled and the frequency band is 26 GHz to 42 GHz, the 7MHz/64QAM
and 14MHz/128QAM work modes are not supported.

NOTE

IF Performance

Table 3-58 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140

ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme ASK

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 10

Interface impedance (ohm) 50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-59 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode LDPC encoding

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95

Item Performance

Adaptive time- Supported

domain equalizer for
baseband signals

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-60 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

x D)

Weight 0.80 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 33 W

3.7 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radiomode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.7.1 Version Description

The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.

3.7.2 Application
ISU2 boards function as SDH IF boards to transmit SDH radio services, or as Integrated IP
radio IF boards to transmit Integrated IP radio services (native E1+Ethernet or native STM-1
+Ethernet).

Functioning as SDH IF Boards

If applied to OptiX RTN 980 NEs building TDM radio networks, ISU2 boards function as large-
capacity SDH IF boards to transmit TDM services.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96

Figure 3-29 Application scenario of ISU2 boards (1)

ISU2 CSHN ISU2

TDM radio network

E1/STM-1 TDM TDM

service ISU2 ISU2 service E1/STM-1
board CSHN CSHN board
STM-1/STM-4
STM-1/STM-4

OptiX RTN 980

NOTE

l When working in SDH radio mode, ISU2 boards transmit 1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 SDH radio services.
l If a TDM radio network needs to transmit a small number of FE/GE services, these services must be
encapsulated into TDM services by EMS6/EFP8 boards before being transmitted.

Functioning as Integrated IP radio IF Boards

ISU2 boards apply to OptiX RTN 980 NEs to transmit native E1 services, native STM-1 services,
native Ethernet services, native MPLS/PWE3 services, or a combination of these services over
Integrated IP radio.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97

Figure 3-30 Application scenario of ISU2 boards (2)

ISU2 CSHN ISU2

IP radio network

E1/STM-1
Service Service E1/STM-1
FE/GE board board
ISU2 ISU2 FE/GE
STM-1/4 CSHN CSHN
STM-1/4
GE
GE

OptiX RTN 980

NOTE

l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, E1 services can be native E1 services
or CES/ATM E1 services, Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or ETH PWE3 services,
and STM-1 services must be native STM-1 services.
l ISU2 boards transmit native E1 services only when these boards work in native E1+Ethernet mode,
and transmit native STM-1 services only when these boards work in native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Ethernet interface boards, STM-1 interface boards,
E1 interface boards, or Smart E1 processing boards.

3.7.3 Functions and Features

The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Table 3-61 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.

Table 3-61 Functions and features

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions l Receives and transmits one IF signal.

l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98

Function and Feature Description

Radio type l Integrated IP radio

l SDH radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.

Service categories in Integrated IP l Native E1 + Ethernet

radio mode l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

Service categories in SDH radio l STM-1

mode l 2xSTM-1

Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s

ATPC Supported

AM Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode

Ethernet frame header compression Supported

E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native

TDM services being E1 services

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the ISU2.

Link-level 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

protection SD protection

N+1 protection Supported

LAG protection Supported

at air interfaces

PLA Supported

TDM service protection SNCP

K byte pass-through Supported

Ethernet service functions See Table 3-62.

MPLS functions See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided

in the section for the system control, switching, and
PWE3 functions timing board.

License Air interface Supported

capacity license

AM license Supported

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99

Function and Feature Description

Clock at the Clock source Clock at the air interface

IEEE 1588v2 Time Supported

clock synchronization

Frequency Not supported

synchronization

PTP port l When an NE using an ISU2 board works in OC or

BC mode, the IF port on the ISU2 board can
function as a PTP port.
l When an NE using an ISU2 board works in TC+BC
mode, the IF port on the ISU2 board can function
as a PTP port whose port type is BC.

DCN Inband DCN Supported

Outband DCN l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes for each
channel in SDH radio mode.

O&M Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports

Cold reset and Supported

warm reset

In-service Supported
FPGA loading

PRBS BER test Supported

at IF ports

Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

Board power Supported

consumption
information
query

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100

Function and Feature Description

Board Supported
temperature
detection

Board power Supported

detection

Table 3-62 Ethernet service functions

Function and Feature Description

Services Native Ethernet l E-Line services

PWE3 Ethernet l E-Line services carried by PWs

ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032/Y.1344.

OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring functions that comply with ITU-T Y.
1731.

LAG Supported

Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

IGMP snooping Supported

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101

Function and Feature Description

QoS See the description of QoS functions provided in the

section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.

RMON Supported

3.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.

NOTE

The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service categories.

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-31 Functional block diagram of the ISU2

Backplane
SMODEM
HSM signal bus
unit Paired board

ODU control signal Service bus

processing

Cross-connect unit
Logic
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit

Overhead bus
MODEM unit
IF processing
interface unit

System control and

Combiner

IF Microwave communication unit

unit

frame signal
processing
Ethernet

GE bus
unit

Packet switching unit

Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU -48 V1

Power
+3.3 V power supplied to supply
unit -48 V2
the other units on the board
+3.3 V power supplied to +3.3 V
the monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to the Clock
System clock signal
other units on the board unit

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-63 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Combiner interface Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
unit and microwave service signals.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates ODU control signals.

l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Filters signals.

l Performs A/D conversion.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generates

specific alarms and performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

6 Ethernet processing l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.

7 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.

NOTE

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-64 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

2 Ethernet processing l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.

unit l Processes GE signals.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are
from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the
logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.

4 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

6 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.

7 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.

8 Combiner interface Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service

unit signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DC-
DC conversion.
l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-32 Front panel of the ISU2

ODU-PWR
ISU2

ISU2

WARNING
IF
STAT

I O
LINK
ODU
RMT

-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV

TURN OFF POWER BEFORE

DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105

Indicators

Table 3-65 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.

On (red) l The ODU is reporting

critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor

alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at The antennas are not aligned.

300 ms intervals

Off The ODU is offline.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is

reporting defects.

Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106

Indicator State Meaning

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.

Off l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Ports

Table 3-66 Description of the Ports

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding

Cable

IF IF port TNC IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

NOTE

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.

The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107

3.7.6 Valid Slots

The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.

Figure 3-33 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ISU2) Slot 14 (ISU2)

Slot 11 (ISU2) Slot 12 (ISU2)

Slot 9 (ISU2) Slot 10 (ISU2)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (ISU2) Slot 8 (ISU2)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (ISU2) Slot 6 (ISU2)

Slot 3 (ISU2) Slot 4 (ISU2)

Slot 1 (ISU2) Slot 2 (ISU2)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108

Figure 3-34 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS

Slot 63 (ODU) Slot 64 (ODU)

Slot 61 (ODU) Slot 62 (ODU)

Slot 59 (ODU) Slot 60 (ODU)

Slot 57 (ODU) Slot 58 (ODU)

Slot 55 (ODU) Slot 56 (ODU)

Slot 53 (ODU) Slot 54 (ODU)

Slot 51 (ODU) Slot 52 (ODU)

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ISU2) Slot 14 (ISU2)

Slot 11 (ISU2) Slot 12 (ISU2)

Slot 9 (ISU2) Slot 10 (ISU2)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (ISU2) Slot 8 (ISU2)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (ISU2) Slot 6 (ISU2)

Slot 3 (ISU2) Slot 4 (ISU2)

Slot 1 (ISU2) Slot 2 (ISU2)

Table 3-67 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 8 and 10 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots
12 and 14 > Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and
2

3.7.7 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109

Radio Work Modes

NOTE

Table 3-68 SDH microwave work modes (ISU2 board)

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

2xSTM-1 128QAM 56 (55)

2xSTM-1 256QAM 50

Table 3-69 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2, E1 + Ethernet)

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

3.5 QPSK 2 4 to 5 4 to 6 4 to 6 4 to 10

3.5 16QAM 4 9 to 11 9 to 13 9 to 13 9 to 20

7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22 10 to 33

7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44 20 to 66

7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54 25 to 80

7 64QAM 15 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67 31 to 100

7 128QAM 18 37 to 47 37 to 56 37 to 80 37 to 119

7 256QAM 20 41 to 53 41 to 62 41 to 90 42 to 134

14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44 20 to 66

14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89 41 to 132

14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110 51 to 164

14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140 65 to 209

14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165 76 to 245

14 (13.75) 256QAM 42 87 to 111 87 to 131 87 to 189 88 to 281

28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89 41 to 132

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265

28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230 107 to 343

28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283 132 to 424

28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495

28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577

56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265

56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533

56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659

56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836

56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983

56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000

40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122 57 to 182

40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247 114 to 366

40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318 148 to 474

40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583

40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691

40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800

50 QPSK 35 73 to 92 73 to 107 73 to 153 73 to 235

50 16QAM 71 148 to 186 148 to 216 148 to 309 148 to 473

50 32QAM 75 191 to 240 191 to 278 191 to 398 191 to 610

50 64QAM 75 235 to 295 235 to 340 235 to 490 235 to 750

50 128QAM 75 275 to 345 275 to 400 275 to 570 275 to 875

50 256QAM 75 317 to 396 317 to 459 317 to 659 317 to 1000

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111

Table 3-70 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)

Channel Modulation Number of Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme STM-1
(MHz) Services in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495

28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577

40 64QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583

40 128QAM 1 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691

40 256QAM 1 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800

50 32QAM 1 191 to 240 191 to 278 191 to 398 191 to 610

50 64QAM 1 235 to 295 235 to 340 235 to 490 235 to 750

50 128QAM 1 275 to 345 275 to 400 275 to 570 275 to 875

50 256QAM 1 317 to 396 317 to 459 317 to 659 317 to 1000

56 (55) 16QAM 1 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533

56 (55) 32QAM 1 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659

56 (55) 64QAM 1 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836

56 (55) 128QAM 1 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983

56 (55) 256QAM 1 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions.
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): UDP messages, untagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): UDP messages, S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 92 bytes to 9600 bytes
l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112

IF Performance

Table 3-71 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140

ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme ASK

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 10

Interface impedance (ohm) 50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-72 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode LDPC encoding

Adaptive time- Supported

domain equalizer for
baseband signals

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-73 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

x D)

Weight 0.60 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 22 W

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113

3.8 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.

3.8.1 Version Description

The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.

3.8.2 Application
ISX2 boards form XPIC workgroups to expand the capacity of an SDH radio hop or Integrated
IP radio hop when transmitting native E1 services, native STM-1 services, native Ethernet
services, native MPLS/PWE3 services, or a combination of these services.

Functioning as SDH IF Boards

If applied to OptiX RTN 980 NEs building TDM radio networks, ISX2 boards function as large-
capacity SDH IF boards to transmit TDM services.

Figure 3-35 Application scenario of ISX2 boards (1)

E1/STM-1 TDM ISX2 TDM

ISX2
Service Service E1/STM-1
board board
CSHN XPIC cable XPIC cable CSHN
STM-1/4
ISX2 ISX2 STM-1/4

OptiX RTN 980

NOTE

l When working in SDH radio mode, ISX2 boards transmit 1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 SDH radio services.
l If a TDM radio network needs to transmit a small number of FE/GE services, these services must be
encapsulated into TDM services by EMS6/EFP8 boards before being transmitted.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114

Functioning as Integrated IP radio IF Boards

ISX2 boards apply to OptiX RTN 980 NEs to transmit native E1 services, native STM-1 services,
native Ethernet services, native MPLS/PWE3 services, or a combination of these services over
Integrated IP radio.

Figure 3-36 Application scenario of ISX2 boards (2)

E1/STM-1
E1/STM-1
Service ISX2 Service
FE/GE ISX2
board board FE/GE
STM-1/4 CSHN XPIC cable XPIC cable CSHN
STM-1/4
GE ISX2 ISX2
GE

OptiX RTN 980

NOTE

l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, E1 services can be native E1 services
or CES/ATM E1 services, Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or ETH PWE3 services,
and STM-1 services must be native STM-1 services.
l ISX2 boards transmit native E1 services only when they work in native E1+Ethernet mode, and transmit
native STM-1 services only when they work in native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Ethernet interface boards, STM-1 interface boards,
E1 interface boards, or Smart E1 processing boards.

3.8.3 Functions and Features

The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the cross-
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving
XPIC reference signals.

Table 3-74 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service functions.

Table 3-74 Functions and features

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions l Receives and transmits one IF signal.

l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115

Function and Feature Description

Radio type l Integrated IP radio

l SDH radio
NOTE
The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.

Service categories in Integrated IP l Native E1 + Ethernet

radio mode l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

Service categories in SDH radio l STM-1

mode l 2xSTM-1

Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s

ATPC Supported

AM Supported only in integrated IP radio mode

AM Booster Supported

Ethernet frame header compression Supported

E1 priority Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with native

TDM services being E1 services

XPIC Supported

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the ISX2.

Link-level 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

protection SD protection

N+1 protection Supported

LAG protection Supported

at air interfaces

PLA Supported

TDM service protection SNCP

K byte pass-through Supported

Ethernet service functions See Table 3-75.

MPLS functions See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided

in the section for the system control, switching, and
PWE3 functions timing board.

License Air interface Supported

capacity license

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116

Function and Feature Description

AM license Supported

Clock at the Clock source Clock at the air interface

IEEE 1588v2 Time Supported

clock synchronization

Frequency Not supported

synchronization

PTP port l When an NE using an ISX2 board works in OC or

BC mode, the IF port on the ISX2 board can function
as a PTP port.
l When an NE using an ISX2 board works in TC+BC
mode, the IF port on the ISX2 board can function as
a PTP port whose port type is BC.

DCN Inband DCN Supported

Outband DCN l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
SDH radio channel.

O&M Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports

Cold reset and Supported

warm reset

In-service Supported
FPGA loading

PRBS BER test Supported

at IF ports

Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117

Function and Feature Description

Board power Supported

consumption
information
query

Board Supported
temperature
detection

Board power Supported

detection

Table 3-75 Ethernet service functions

Function and Feature Description

Services Native Ethernet l E-Line services

PWE3 Ethernet l E-Line services carried by PWs

ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032 v1/v2.

OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring functions that comply with ITU-T Y.
1731.

LAG Supported

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118

Function and Feature Description

Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

IGMP snooping Supported

QoS See the description of QoS functions provided in the

section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.

RMON Supported

3.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.

NOTE

The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service types.

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-37 Functional block diagram of the ISX2

Backplane

SMODEM
HSM signal bus
unit
Paired board

ODU control signal Service bus

processing

Cross-connect unit
Logic
MUX/DEMUX unit

unit

System control and

processing
Combiner
interface

IF communication unit
Microwave MODEM Overhead
unit

unit

frame signal unit bus

Ethernet GE bus
processing Packet switching unit
unit
Paired XPIC XPIC signal
board
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU Power -48 V1

supply
+3.3 V power supplied to the
unit -48 V2
other units on the board
+3.3 V power supplied to
+3.3 V
the monitoring circuit

Clock signal provided to the Clock

System clock signal
other units on the board unit

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-76 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Combiner interface Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
unit and microwave service signals.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates ODU control signals.

l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two
channels of signals.
Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF

signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generates

specific alarms and performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

6 Ethernet processing l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.

7 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.

NOTE

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-77 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

2 Ethernet processing l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.

unit l Processes GE signals.

4 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

5 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.

6 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.

7 Combiner interface Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service

unit signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:

l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DC-
DC conversion.
l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-38 Front panel of the ISX2

ODU-PWR
ISX2

ISX2
WARNING
IF
STAT
XPIC

I O
LINK
ODU
-48V OUTPUT RMT
ACT
SRV

TURN OFF POWER BEFORE

DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL X-IN X-OUT

Indicators

Table 3-78 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2

Indicator State Meaning

XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is

normal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function is

disabled.

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123

Indicator State Meaning

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.

On (red) l The ODU is reporting

critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor

alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at The antennas are not aligned.

300 ms intervals

Off The ODU is offline.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is

reporting defects.

Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124

Indicator State Meaning

Off l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Ports

Table 3-79 Description of the ports

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding

Cable

IF IF port TNC IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

X-IN XPIC signal input SMA XPIC cable

port

X-OUT XPIC signal output SMA

port

NOTE

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.

The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125

3.8.6 Valid Slots

The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.

Figure 3-39 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ISX2) Slot 14 (ISX2)

Slot 11 (ISX2) Slot 12 (ISX2)

Slot 9 (ISX2) Slot 10 (ISX2)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (ISX2) Slot 8 (ISX2)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (ISX2) Slot 6 (ISX2)

Slot 3 (ISX2) Slot 4 (ISX2)

Slot 1 (ISX2) Slot 2 (ISX2)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126

Figure 3-40 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS

Slot 63 (ODU) Slot 64 (ODU)

Slot 61 (ODU) Slot 62 (ODU)

Slot 59 (ODU) Slot 60 (ODU)

Slot 57 (ODU) Slot 58 (ODU)

Slot 55 (ODU) Slot 56 (ODU)

Slot 53 (ODU) Slot 54 (ODU)

Slot 51 (ODU) Slot 52 (ODU)

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ISX2) Slot 14 (ISX2)

Slot 11 (ISX2) Slot 12 (ISX2)

Slot 9 (ISX2) Slot 10 (ISX2)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (ISX2) Slot 8 (ISX2)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (ISX2) Slot 6 (ISX2)

Slot 3 (ISX2) Slot 4 (ISX2)

Slot 1 (ISX2) Slot 2 (ISX2)

One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or
adjacently in the same column.

3.8.7 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Radio Work Modes

NOTE

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127

Table 3-80 SDH microwave work modes (ISX2 board@IS2-mode)

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

2xSTM-1 128QAM 56 (55)

2xSTM-1 256QAM 50
NOTE
For the ISX2 board in SDH service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether
the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.

Table 3-81 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC disabled)

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22 10 to 33

7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44 20 to 66

7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54 25 to 80

7 64QAM 15 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67 31 to 100

7 128QAM 18 37 to 47 37 to 56 37 to 80 37 to 119

7 256QAM 20 41 to 53 41 to 62 41 to 90 42 to 134

14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44 20 to 66

14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89 41 to 132

14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110 51 to 164

14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140 65 to 209

14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165 76 to 245

14 (13.75) 256QAM 42 87 to 111 87 to 131 87 to 189 88 to 281

28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89 41 to 132

28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265

28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230 107 to 343

28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283 132 to 424

28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577

56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265

56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533

56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659

56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836

56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983

56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000

40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122 57 to 182

40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247 114 to 366

40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318 148 to 474

40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583

40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691

40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800

50 QPSK 35 73 to 92 73 to 107 73 to 153 73 to 235

50 16QAM 71 148 to 186 148 to 216 148 to 309 148 to 473

50 32QAM 75 191 to 240 191 to 278 191 to 398 191 to 610

50 64QAM 75 235 to 295 235 to 340 235 to 490 235 to 750

50 128QAM 75 275 to 345 275 to 400 275 to 570 275 to 875

50 256QAM 75 317 to 396 317 to 459 317 to 659 317 to 1000

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129

Table 3-82 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2, E1 + Ethernet, XPIC enabled)

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

7 QPSK 4 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22 10 to 33

7 16QAM 9 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44 20 to 66

7 32QAM 11 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54 25 to 80

7 64QAMa 14 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67 31 to 100

14 (13.75) QPSK 9 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44 20 to 66

14 (13.75) 16QAM 19 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89 41 to 132

14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110 51 to 164

14 (13.75) 64QAM 30 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140 65 to 209

14 (13.75) 128QAMa 36 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165 76 to 245

28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89 41 to 132

28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265

28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230 107 to 343

28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283 132 to 424

28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495

28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577

56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265

56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533

56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659

56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836

56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983

56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000

40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122 57 to 182

40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247 114 to 366

40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318 148 to 474

40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691

40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800

50 QPSK 35 73 to 92 73 to 107 73 to 153 73 to 235

50 16QAM 71 148 to 186 148 to 216 148 to 309 148 to 473

50 32QAM 75 191 to 240 191 to 278 191 to 398 191 to 610

50 64QAM 75 235 to 295 235 to 340 235 to 490 235 to 750

50 128QAM 75 275 to 345 275 to 400 275 to 570 275 to 875

50 256QAM 75 317 to 396 317 to 459 317 to 659 317 to 1000

NOTE
When the channel spacing is 7 MHz or 14 MHz and the XPIC function is enabled, the ISX2 board only supports the XMC-2 ODU.
a: When the XPIC function is enabled and the frequency band is 26 GHz to 42 GHz, the 7MHz/64QAM and 14MHz/128QAM
work modes are not supported.

Table 3-83 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)

Channel Modulation Number of Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme STM-1
(MHz) Services in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495

28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577

40 64QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583

40 128QAM 1 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691

40 256QAM 1 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800

50 32QAM 1 191 to 240 191 to 278 191 to 398 191 to 610

50 64QAM 1 235 to 295 235 to 340 235 to 490 235 to 750

50 128QAM 1 275 to 345 275 to 400 275 to 570 275 to 875

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131

Channel Modulation Number of Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme STM-1
(MHz) Services in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

50 256QAM 1 317 to 396 317 to 459 317 to 659 317 to 1000

56 (55) 16QAM 1 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533

56 (55) 32QAM 1 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659

56 (55) 64QAM 1 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836

56 (55) 128QAM 1 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983

56 (55) 256QAM 1 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000
NOTE
For the ISX2 board in STM-1 + Ethernet service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC
function is enabled or disabled.

NOTE

IF Performance

Table 3-84 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140

ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme ASK

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132

Item Performance

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 10

Interface impedance (ohm) 50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-85 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode LDPC encoding

Adaptive time- Supported

domain equalizer for
baseband signals

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-86 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

x D)

Weight 0.60 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 23 W

3.9 ISV3
ISV3 boards are multi-purpose IF boards that support Integrated IP radio, SDH radio, and DC-
I power distribution. Once the appropriate license files are loaded, the boards also support cross
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC).

3.9.1 Version Description

The functional version of ISV3 boards is SL91.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133

3.9.2 Application
ISV3 boards function as SDH IF boards to transmit SDH radio services, or as Integrated IP
radio IF boards to transmit Integrated IP radio services (native E1+Ethernet or native STM-1
+Ethernet). Should transmission capacity need to be expanded, XPIC is supported.

NOTE

Compared with ISU2/ISX2 boards, ISV3 boards support 512QAM or higher-order modulation schemes.

Functioning as SDH IF Boards

If applied to OptiX RTN 980 NEs building TDM radio networks, ISV3 boards function as large-
capacity SDH IF boards to transmit TDM services.

Figure 3-41 Application scenario of ISV3 boards with XPIC disabled (1)

ISV3 CSHN ISV3

TDM radio network

E1/STM-1 TDM TDM

Service ISV3 ISV3 Service E1/STM-1
board CSHN CSHN board
STM-1/STM-4
STM-1/STM-4

OptiX RTN 980

NOTE

l When working in SDH radio mode, ISV3 boards transmit 1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1 SDH radio services.
l If a TDM radio network needs to transmit a small number of FE/GE services, these services must be
encapsulated into TDM services by EMS6/EFP8 boards before transmission.
l To expand the capacity of an SDH radio hop, use ISV3 boards with XPIC enabled to transmit TDM
services, as shown in Figure 3-42.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134

Figure 3-42 Application scenario of ISV3 boards with XPIC enabled (2)

E1/STM-1 TDM ISV3 TDM

ISV3
Service Service E1/STM-1
board board
CSHN XPIC cable XPIC cable CSHN
STM-1/4
ISV3 ISV3 STM-1/4

OptiX RTN 980

Functioning as Integrated IP radio IF Boards

ISV3 boards also apply to OptiX RTN 980 NEs to transmit native E1 services, native STM-1
services, native Ethernet services, native MPLS/PWE3 services, or a combination of these
services over Integrated IP radio.

Figure 3-43 Application scenario of ISV3 boards with XPIC disabled (1)

ISV3 CSHN ISV3

IP radio network

E1/STM-1
Service Service E1/STM-1
FE/GE board board
ISV3 ISV3 FE/GE
STM-1/4 CSHN CSHN
STM-1/4
GE
GE

OptiX RTN 980

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135

NOTE

l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, E1 services can be native E1 services
or CES/ATM E1 services, Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or ETH PWE3 services,
and STM-1 services must be native STM-1 services.
l ISV3 boards will transmit native E1 services only when these boards work in native E1+Ethernet mode,
and will transmit native STM-1 services only when these boards work in native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Ethernet interface boards, STM-1 interface boards,
E1 interface boards, or Smart E1 processing boards.
l To expand the capacity of an Integrated IP radio hop, use ISV3 boards with XPIC enabled, as shown
in Figure 3-44.

Figure 3-44 Application scenario of ISV3 boards with XPIC enabled (2)

E1/STM-1
E1/STM-1
Service ISV3 Service
FE/GE ISV3
board board FE/GE
STM-1/4 CSHN XPIC cable XPIC cable CSHN
STM-1/4
GE ISV3 ISV3
GE

OptiX RTN 980

3.9.3 Functions and Features

ISV3 boards receive and transmit 1xIF signals, provide management channels to ODUs, and
supply -48 V power to ODUs. When the XPIC function is enabled, ISV3 boards also implement
XPIC for IF signals by transmitting and receiving XPIC reference signals.

Table 3-87 lists the functions and features supported by ISV3 boards. ISV3 boards implement
Ethernet and packet service functions by working with packet switching units on system control,
switching, and timing boards.

Table 3-87 Functions and features that ISV3 boards support

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions l Receives and transmits 1xIF signals.

l Provides management channels to ODUs.
l Supplies -48 V power to ODUs.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136

Function and Feature Description

Radio types l Integrated IP radio

l SDH radio
NOTE
Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet
radio.

Running modes l IS2 mode, in which ISV3 boards can work with
ISU2/ISX2 boards.
l IS3 mode, in which ISV3 boards support high-order
and flexible forward error correction (FEC)
modulation schemes besides QPSK to 256QAM.
For differences between the two modes, see 3.9.7
Technical Specifications.

High-order modulation schemes Supports the following high-order modulation

schemes:
l 512QAM
l 1024QAM

Flexible FEC modulation schemes Supports the following flexible FEC modulation
schemes:
l QPSK Strong
l 16QAM Strong
l 512QAM Light
l 1024QAM Light
Compared with QPSK/16QAM, QPSK Strong/
16QAM Strong has stronger FEC capability, and
therefore has better receiver sensitivity. It has,
however, less air interface bandwidth. Compared with
512QAM/1024QAM, 512QAM Light/1024QAM
Light has weaker FEC capability, and therefore has
worse receiver sensitivity. It has, however, higher air
interface bandwidth.

Service types in Integrated IP l Native E1 + Ethernet

radio mode l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into pseudo wire emulation
edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets.

Service types in SDH radio mode l STM-1

l 2xSTM-1

Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s

Automatic transmit power control Supported

(ATPC)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137

Function and Feature Description

Adaptive modulation (AM) Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode

E1 priorities Supported only if native TDM services transmitted

over Integrated IP radio are E1 services

Compression of Ethernet frame Supported

headers

XPIC Supported

Radio working mode See 3.9.7 Technical Specifications.

N+1 protection Supported

Link Supported
aggregation
groups (LAGs)
at air interfaces

Physical link Supported

aggregation
(PLA)

TDM service protection Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP)

K byte pass-through Supported

Ethernet service functions See Table 3-88.

Multiprotocol Label Switching Refer to the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions

(MPLS) functions provided in the sections about system control,
switching, and timing boards.
PWE3 functions

Physical layer Clock source Air interface clock

clock
Clock l Protection implemented by providing clock sources
protection with different priorities
l Protection implemented by running the
Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol
l Protection implemented by running the extended
SSM protocol

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138

Function and Feature Description

IEEE 1588v2 Time Supported

clock synchronization

Frequency Not supported

synchronization

Precision Time l The IF ports of ISV3 boards can work as PTP ports
Protocol (PTP) if the NEs housing the boards work in ordinary
port clock (OC) or boundary clock (BC) mode.
l The IF ports of ISV3 boards can work as PTP BC
ports if the NEs housing the boards work in TC+BC
(TC stands for transparent clock) mode.

Data Inband DCN Supports inband DCN. DCN bandwidth is

communication configurable.
network (DCN)
Outband DCN l Supports one data communications channel (DCC)
that is composed of three DCC bytes for each
channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes for each
channel in SDH radio mode.

Operation and Loopback l Supports inloops and outloops at IF ports.

management l Supports inloops and outloops at composite
(COMP) ports.

Cold and warm Supported

resetting

In-service field Supported

programmable
gate array
(FPGA) loading

Pseudo random Supported

binary sequence
(PRBS) test at
IF ports

Manufacturer Supported
information
query

Power Supported
consumption
query

Temperature Supported
monitoring

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139

Function and Feature Description

Voltage Supported
monitoring

Table 3-88 Ethernet service functions

Function and Feature Description

Ethernet Native Ethernet l E-Line services

services services Port-based E-line services
VLAN-based E-line services
E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-LAN services
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

PWE3 Ethernet l E-Line services carried by PWs

Ethernet ring protection switching Supported (complies with ITU-T G.8032 v1/v2)
(ERPS)

Operation, administration, and l Supports ETH OAM functions that comply with
management (OAM) IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
l Supports frame loss measurement, frame delay
measurement, and delay variation measurement
functions that comply with ITU-T Y.1731.

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Supports Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
that runs only Common and Internal Spanning Tree
(CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the same
functions as Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).

IGMP snooping Supported

Quality of service (QoS) Refer to the description of QoS functions provided in

the sections about system control, switching, and
timing boards.

Remote network monitoring Supported

(RMON)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140

3.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how the function units of an ISV3 board process Integrated IP radio IF
signals.

NOTE

ISV3 boards process signals transmitted over SDH radio in the same way as they process signals transmitted
over Integrated IP radio. The only differences are with regard to the microwave frame structure and
processed service types.

Function Block Diagram

Figure 3-45 ISV3 board function block diagram

Backplane

SMODEM unit HSM signal bus

Paired board

ODU control signal

processing
Service bus
Cross-connect unit

MUX/DEMUX unit

Logic
unit
processing
Combiner
interface

System control and

IF
unit

Microwave MODEM
unit

Overhead communication unit

frame signal unit bus

Ethernet GE bus
processing Packet switching unit
unit
Paired XPIC board
XPIC signal

Control bus System control and

communication unit

Logic
control unit

-48 V power
supplied to an ODU Power -48 V 1
+3.3 V power supplied to supply
other units on the board unit -48 V 2
+3.3 V power supplied to
+3.3 V
the monitoring circuit

Clock signal provided to Clock

System clock signal
other units on the board unit

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-89 Signal processing in the receive direction of an ISV3 board

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Combiner interface Separates ODU control signals from microwave service

unit signals.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates ODU control signals.

l Transmits ODU control signals to the system control
and communication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Filters microwave service signals.

l If XPIC is disabled, converts microwave service
signals into digital signals and transmits these signals
to the modem unit.
l If XPIC is enabled:
Splits microwave service signals into two channels
of signals, converts one channel of signals into
digital signals and transmits them to the modem
unit, and transmits the other channel of signals to
the paired board as XPIC signals.
Converts XPIC signals from the paired board into
digital signals and transmits the digital signals to
the modem unit.

4 Modem unit l If XPIC is disabled, performs digital demodulation.

l If XPIC is enabled:
Performs digital demodulation using XPIC IF
signals from the paired board as reference signals.
Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs forward error correction (FEC) decoding
and generates alarms, if any.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generates

alarms and performance events, if any.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
alarms and performance events, if any.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
alarms and performance events, if any.
l Detects changes in both ATPC messages and response
messages, and reports the changes to the system
control and communication unit over the control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
(including F1 and serial bytes), and DCC bytes from
microwave frames, and transmits the bytes to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to specific positions in VC-4s
and transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit
(if native TDM services transmitted over Integrated
IP radio are E1 services).
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit (if
native TDM services transmitted over Integrated IP
radio are STM-1 services).
l Extracts Ethernet signals from the microwave service
signals, and transmits the Ethernet signals to the
Ethernet processing unit.

6 Ethernet processing l Processes GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.

7 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and
communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.

NOTE

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-90 Signal processing in the transmit direction of an ISV3 board

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

2 Ethernet processing l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.

unit l Processes GE signals.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are
from the logic processing unit (if native TDM services
transmitted over Integrated IP radio are E1 services).
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals from the logic
processing unit to form STM-1 signals (if native TDM
services transmitted over Integrated IP radio are
STM-1 services).
l Sets overheads for microwave frames.
l Combines Ethernet signals, E1/STM-1 service
signals, and microwave frame overheads to form
microwave frames.

4 Modem unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

5 IF processing unit l Performs digital/analog conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.

6 SMODEM unit Modulates ODU control signals from the system control
and communication unit.

7 Combiner interface Combines ODU control signals, microwave service

unit signals, and -48 V power signals, and transmits the
combined signals through an IF cable.

Control Signal Processing

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus on the backplane, and supplies -48 V power to an ODU after performing DC-
DC conversion.
l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus on the backplane, and supplies +3.3 V power to other units on the ISV3 board
after performing DC-DC conversion.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.9.5 Front Panel

An ISV3 board has indicators, XPIC signal ports, one IF port, one ODU power switch, and labels
on its front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-46 Front panel of an ISV3 board

X-IN X-OUT ODU-PWR
ISV3

WARNING
I O
IF
STAT
XPIC

-48V OUTPUT
ODU
LINK

RMT
ACT
SRV

TURN OFF POWER BEFORE

DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL

Indicators

Table 3-91 Status explanation for indicators on an ISV3 board

Indicator State Meaning

XPIC On (green) XPIC input signals are

normal.

On (red) XPIC input signals are lost.

Off XPIC is disabled.

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145

Indicator State Meaning

Off The board is not working, not

created, or not powered on.

SRV On (green) Services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm has

been reported.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm has

been reported.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.

On (red) The ODU has reported a

critical or major alarm, or
was not powered on.

On (yellow) The ODU has reported a

minor alarm.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at Antennas are not well

300 ms intervals aligned.

Off The ODU is offline.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment has

reported a defect.

Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.

ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the

board is working as the main
board.
In an unprotected system, the
board has been activated.

Off In a 1+1 protected system, the

board is working as the
standby board.
In an unprotected system, the
board has not been activated.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146

Ports

Table 3-92 Description of the ports

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding

Cable

IF IF port TNC IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

X-IN XPIC signal input SMA XPIC cable

port

X-OUT XPIC signal output SMA

port

NOTE

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.

The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.9.6 Valid Slots

An ISV3 board can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 14. Its logical slot on the network management
system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147

Figure 3-47 Slots for ISV3 boards in a chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ISV3) Slot 14 (ISV3)

Slot 11 (ISV3) Slot 12 (ISV3)

Slot 9 (ISV3) Slot 10 (ISV3)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (ISV3) Slot 8 (ISV3)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (ISV3) Slot 6 (ISV3)

Slot 3 (ISV3) Slot 4 (ISV3)

Slot 1 (ISV3) Slot 2 (ISV3)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot ID
of an ODU is equal to the logical slot ID of the connected IF board plus 50.

Figure 3-48 Logical slots of ISV3 boards on the NMS

Slot 63 (ODU) Slot 64 (ODU)

Slot 61 (ODU) Slot 62 (ODU)

Slot 59 (ODU) Slot 60 (ODU)

Slot 57 (ODU) Slot 58 (ODU)

Slot 55 (ODU) Slot 56 (ODU)

Slot 53 (ODU) Slot 54 (ODU)

Slot 51 (ODU) Slot 52 (ODU)

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ISV3) Slot 14 (ISV3)

Slot 11 (ISV3) Slot 12 (ISV3)

Slot 9 (ISV3) Slot 10 (ISV3)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (ISV3) Slot 8 (ISV3)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (ISV3) Slot 6 (ISV3)

Slot 3 (ISV3) Slot 4 (ISV3)

Slot 1 (ISV3) Slot 2 (ISV3)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148

Table 3-93 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 8 and 10 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots
12 and 14 > Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and
2

When implementing XPIC, one ISV3 pair must be installed adjacent to each other in the same
row or column.

3.9.7 Technical Specifications

This section describes board specifications, including running modes, radio working modes, IF
performance, modem performance, mechanical behaviors, and power consumption.

Running Modes
ISV3 boards can work in either IS3 or IS2 mode.

Table 3-94 Application scenarios of each running mode

Running Mode Application Scenario

IS3 mode IS3 is the default mode. An ISV3 board working in IS3 mode can
interconnect with another ISV3 board or an OptiX RTN 905.
For information about radio working modes that ISV3 boards working
in IS3 mode support, see Table 3-95 to Table 3-99 in this section.

IS2 mode IS2 is an optional mode. An ISV3 board working in IS2 mode can
interconnect with an ISU2/ISX2 board.
l ISV3 boards working in IS2 mode and with XPIC disabled support
the same radio working modes as ISU2 boards. For information
about the supported radio working modes, see 3.7.7 Technical
Specifications.
l ISV3 boards working in IS2 mode and with XPIC enabled support
the same radio working modes as ISX2 boards. For information
about the supported radio working modes, see 3.8.7 Technical
Specifications.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149

Radio Working Modes

NOTE

Table 3-95 SDH microwave work modes (ISV3 board@IS3-mode)

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

2STM-1 128QAM 56 (55)

NOTE
For the ISV3 board in SDH service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether
the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.

Table 3-96 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISV3 @IS3-mode, E1 + Ethernet, XPIC disabled)

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

7 QPSK Strong 4 8 to 10 8 to 13 8 to 20 8 to 26

7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 16 10 to 25 10 to 33

7 16QAM 8 17 to 22 17 to 26 17 to 41 18 to 55
Strong

7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 32 21 to 49 21 to 66

7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 39 26 to 61 26 to 81

7 64QAM 15 32 to 40 32 to 50 33 to 77 33 to 102

7 128QAM 18 37 to 48 38 to 58 38 to 90 39 to 120

7 256QAM 20 42 to 53 42 to 65 43 to 101 44 to 135

7 512QAM 21 45 to 57 45 to 69 46 to 107 46 to 143

7 512QAM 22 48 to 61 48 to 74 49 to 115 50 to 153

Light

7 1024QAM 23 51 to 65 51 to 79 52 to 122 53 to 163

14 (13.75) QPSK Strong 8 17 to 22 17 to 27 17 to 41 18 to 55

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

14 (13.75) QPSK 10 21 to 26 21 to 32 21 to 50 21 to 66

14 (13.75) 16QAM 16 35 to 45 35 to 55 36 to 84 36 to 113

Strong

14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 53 42 to 64 42 to 99 43 to 133

14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 52 to 66 52 to 80 53 to 124 54 to 166

14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 66 to 101 67 to 156 68 to 208

14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 77 to 98 78 to 120 79 to 185 80 to 247

14 (13.75) 256QAM 42 88 to 112 89 to 137 90 to 211 92 to 282

14 (13.75) 512QAM 44 94 to 119 94 to 145 96 to 224 97 to 299

14 (13.75) 512QAM 46 100 to 127 101 to 155 102 to 240 104 to 320
Light

14 (13.75) 1024QAM 48 104 to 131 104 to 161 106 to 248 108 to 331

14 (13.75) 1024QAM 50 109 to 138 110 to 169 111 to 260 113 to 347
Light

28 (27.5) QPSK Strong 17 36 to 46 36 to 56 37 to 87 38 to 116

28 (27.5) QPSK 20 42 to 54 43 to 66 43 to 102 44 to 135

28 (27.5) 16QAM 34 73 to 93 74 to 114 75 to 176 76 to 234

Strong

28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 86 to 109 86 to 133 88 to 205 89 to 274

28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 110 to 139 110 to 170 112 to 262 114 to 350

28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 135 to 172 136 to 210 138 to 324 141 to 432

28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 203 162 to 248 164 to 383 167 to 511

28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 183 to 232 184 to 284 187 to 438 190 to 584

28 (27.5) 512QAM 75 196 to 249 198 to 304 200 to 469 204 to 626

28 (27.5) 512QAM 75 210 to 266 212 to 325 214 to 502 218 to 670
Light

28 (27.5) 1024QAM 75 217 to 275 219 to 337 222 to 520 226 to 693

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

28 (27.5) 1024QAM 75 228 to 289 230 to 353 233 to 545 237 to 727
Light

56 (55) QPSK Strong 34 73 to 93 74 to 114 75 to 176 76 to 235

56 (55) QPSK 40 86 to 109 87 to 133 88 to 206 89 to 275

56 (55) 16QAM 68 148 to 188 150 to 230 151 to 355 154 to 473
Strong

56 (55) 16QAM 75 173 to 220 175 to 269 177 to 415 180 to 553

56 (55) 32QAM 75 217 to 275 219 to 336 222 to 519 226 to 692

56 (55) 64QAM 75 273 to 346 275 to 423 279 to 653 284 to 871

56 (55) 128QAM 75 323 to 409 326 to 501 330 to 772 336 to 1000

56 (55) 256QAM 75 369 to 467 372 to 571 376 to 882 384 to 1000

56 (55) 512QAM 75 395 to 501 398 to 612 404 to 945 411 to 1000

56 (55) 512QAM 75 423 to 536 426 to 655 432 to 1000 440 to 1000
Light

56 (55) 1024QAM 75 447 to 567 451 to 693 456 to 1000 465 to 1000

56 (55) 1024QAM 75 481 to 609 485 to 745 491 to 1000 500 to 1000
Light

40 QPSK Strong 23 50 to 63 50 to 77 51 to 119 52 to 159

40 QPSK 27 58 to 74 58 to 90 59 to 139 60 to 186

40 16QAM 46 100 to 127 101 to 156 102 to 240 104 to 321

Strong

40 16QAM 55 117 to 149 118 to 182 120 to 281 122 to 375

40 32QAM 71 150 to 190 151 to 232 153 to 359 156 to 478

40 64QAM 75 185 to 235 187 to 287 189 to 443 193 to 591

40 128QAM 75 219 to 278 221 to 339 224 to 524 228 to 699

40 256QAM 75 253 to 321 255 to 392 258 to 605 263 to 807

40 512QAM 75 268 to 340 270 to 415 274 to 641 279 to 855

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

40 512QAM 75 287 to 363 289 to 444 293 to 686 298 to 915

Light

40 1024QAM 75 302 to 383 304 to 468 309 to 723 314 to 964

40 1024QAM 75 317 to 402 320 to 491 324 to 758 330 to 1000

Light

Table 3-97 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISV3 @IS3-mode, E1 + Ethernet, XPIC enabled)

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

7 QPSK Strong 3 8 to 10 8 to 12 8 to 19 8 to 25

7 QPSK 4 10 to 12 10 to 15 10 to 24 10 to 32

7 16QAM 6 16 to 21 17 to 26 17 to 40 17 to 53
Strong

7 16QAM 9 20 to 25 20 to 31 20 to 48 21 to 64

7 32QAM 11 24 to 31 25 to 38 25 to 59 25 to 79

7 64QAM 14 31 to 39 31 to 48 32 to 74 32 to 99

7 128QAM 17 36 to 46 37 to 56 37 to 87 38 to 117

14 (13.75) QPSK Strong 8 16 to 21 17 to 26 17 to 40 17 to 53

14 (13.75) QPSK 9 20 to 25 20 to 31 20 to 48 21 to 64

14 (13.75) 16QAM 16 34 to 43 34 to 53 35 to 82 35 to 109

Strong

14 (13.75) 16QAM 19 40 to 51 40 to 62 41 to 97 42 to 129

14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 50 to 64 51 to 78 51 to 121 52 to 161

14 (13.75) 64QAM 30 63 to 80 64 to 98 65 to 152 66 to 202

14 (13.75) 128QAM 36 75 to 95 76 to 116 77 to 180 78 to 240

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

14 (13.75) 256QAM 40 85 to 107 85 to 131 86 to 203 88 to 270

28 (27.5) QPSK Strong 17 36 to 46 36 to 56 37 to 87 38 to 116

28 (27.5) QPSK 20 42 to 54 43 to 66 43 to 102 44 to 135

28 (27.5) 16QAM 34 73 to 93 74 to 114 75 to 176 76 to 234

Strong

28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 86 to 109 86 to 133 88 to 205 89 to 274

28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 110 to 139 110 to 170 112 to 262 114 to 350

28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 135 to 172 136 to 210 138 to 324 141 to 432

28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 203 162 to 248 164 to 383 167 to 511

28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 182 to 230 183 to 281 185 to 434 189 to 579

28 (27.5) 512QAM 75 188 to 239 190 to 292 192 to 450 196 to 601

28 (27.5) 512QAM 75 201 to 255 203 to 312 206 to 482 210 to 643
Light

56 (55) QPSK Strong 34 73 to 93 74 to 114 75 to 176 76 to 235

56 (55) QPSK 40 86 to 109 87 to 133 88 to 206 89 to 275

56 (55) 16QAM 68 148 to 188 150 to 230 151 to 355 154 to 473
Strong

56 (55) 16QAM 75 173 to 220 175 to 269 177 to 415 180 to 553

56 (55) 32QAM 75 217 to 275 219 to 336 222 to 519 226 to 692

56 (55) 64QAM 75 273 to 346 275 to 423 279 to 653 284 to 871

56 (55) 128QAM 75 323 to 409 326 to 501 330 to 772 336 to 1000

56 (55) 256QAM 75 365 to 462 368 to 565 372 to 872 379 to 1000

56 (55) 512QAM 75 379 to 481 382 to 588 387 to 907 395 to 1000

56 (55) 512QAM 75 406 to 514 409 to 629 414 to 971 422 to 1000
Light

56 (55) 1024QAM 75 433 to 548 436 to 670 441 to 1000 450 to 1000

56 (55) 1024QAM 75 454 to 575 458 to 703 463 to 1000 472 to 1000
Light

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

40 QPSK Strong 23 50 to 63 50 to 77 51 to 119 52 to 159

40 QPSK 27 58 to 74 58 to 90 59 to 139 60 to 186

40 16QAM 46 100 to 127 101 to 156 102 to 240 104 to 321

Strong

40 16QAM 55 117 to 149 118 to 182 120 to 281 122 to 375

40 32QAM 71 150 to 190 151 to 232 153 to 359 156 to 478

40 64QAM 75 185 to 235 187 to 287 189 to 443 193 to 591

40 128QAM 75 219 to 278 221 to 339 224 to 524 228 to 699

40 256QAM 75 251 to 318 253 to 389 256 to 600 261 to 800

40 512QAM 75 257 to 326 259 to 399 263 to 615 268 to 821

40 512QAM 75 275 to 349 277 to 427 281 to 658 286 to 878

Light

40 1024QAM 75 293 to 372 296 to 454 300 to 701 305 to 935

Table 3-98 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISV3 board @IS3 mode, STM-1 + Ethernet, XPIC disabled)

Channel Modulation Number of Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme STM-1
(MHz) Services in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 160 to 203 162 to 248 164 to 383 167 to 511

28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 183 to 232 184 to 284 187 to 438 190 to 584

28 (27.5) 512QAM 1 196 to 249 198 to 304 200 to 469 204 to 626

28 (27.5) 512QAM 1 210 to 266 212 to 325 214 to 502 218 to 670
Light

28 (27.5) 1024QAM 1 217 to 275 219 to 337 222 to 520 226 to 693

28 (27.5) 1024QAM 1 228 to 289 230 to 353 233 to 545 237 to 727
Light

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155

Channel Modulation Number of Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme STM-1
(MHz) Services in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

56 (55) 16QAM 1 173 to 220 175 to 269 177 to 415 180 to 553

56 (55) 32QAM 1 217 to 275 219 to 336 222 to 519 226 to 692

56 (55) 64QAM 1 273 to 346 275 to 423 279 to 653 284 to 871

56 (55) 128QAM 1 323 to 409 326 to 501 330 to 772 336 to 1000

56 (55) 256QAM 1 369 to 467 372 to 571 376 to 882 384 to 1000

56 (55) 512QAM 1 395 to 501 398 to 612 404 to 945 411 to 1000

56 (55) 512QAM 1 423 to 536 426 to 655 432 to 1000 440 to 1000
Light

56 (55) 1024QAM 1 447 to 567 451 to 693 456 to 1000 465 to 1000

56 (55) 1024QAM 1 481 to 609 485 to 745 491 to 1000 500 to 1000
Light

40 64QAM 1 185 to 235 187 to 287 189 to 443 193 to 591

40 128QAM 1 219 to 278 221 to 339 224 to 524 228 to 699

40 256QAM 1 253 to 321 255 to 392 258 to 605 263 to 807

40 512QAM 1 268 to 340 270 to 415 274 to 641 279 to 855

40 512QAM 1 287 to 363 289 to 444 293 to 686 298 to 915

Light

40 1024QAM 1 302 to 383 304 to 468 309 to 723 314 to 964

40 1024QAM 1 317 to 402 320 to 491 324 to 758 330 to 1000

Light

Table 3-99 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISV3 board @IS3-mode, STM-1 + Ethernet, XPIC enabled)

Channel Modulation Number of Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme STM-1
(MHz) Services in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 160 to 203 162 to 248 164 to 383 167 to 511

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156

Channel Modulation Number of Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme STM-1
(MHz) Services in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)

28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 182 to 230 183 to 281 185 to 434 189 to 579

28 (27.5) 512QAM 1 188 to 239 190 to 292 192 to 450 196 to 601

28 (27.5) 512QAM 1 201 to 255 203 to 312 206 to 482 210 to 643
Light

56 (55) 16QAM 1 173 to 220 175 to 269 177 to 415 180 to 553

56 (55) 32QAM 1 217 to 275 219 to 336 222 to 519 226 to 692

56 (55) 64QAM 1 273 to 346 275 to 423 279 to 653 284 to 871

56 (55) 128QAM 1 323 to 409 326 to 501 330 to 772 336 to 1000

56 (55) 256QAM 1 365 to 462 368 to 565 372 to 872 379 to 1000

56 (55) 512QAM 1 379 to 481 382 to 588 387 to 907 395 to 1000

56 (55) 512QAM 1 406 to 514 409 to 629 414 to 971 422 to 1000
Light

56 (55) 1024QAM 1 433 to 548 436 to 670 441 to 1000 450 to 1000

56 (55) 1024QAM 1 454 to 575 458 to 703 463 to 1000 472 to 1000
Light

40 64QAM 1 185 to 235 187 to 287 189 to 443 193 to 591

40 128QAM 1 219 to 278 221 to 339 224 to 524 228 to 699

40 256QAM 1 251 to 318 253 to 389 256 to 600 261 to 800

40 512QAM 1 257 to 326 259 to 399 263 to 615 268 to 821

40 512QAM 1 275 to 349 277 to 427 281 to 658 286 to 878

Light

40 1024QAM 1 293 to 372 296 to 454 300 to 701 305 to 935

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work modes (@IS3 mode) that the ISV3 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions.
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
1518 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): UDP messages, C-tagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): UDP messages, S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 92 bytes to 1518 bytes
l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.

IF Performance

Table 3-100 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140

ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme ASK

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 10

Interface impedance (ohm) 50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of Modems

Table 3-101 Baseband signal processing performance of modems

Item Performance

Encoding mode Low-density parity check (LDPC) encoding

Adaptive time- Supported

domain equalizer for
baseband signals

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158

Mechanical Behaviors

Table 3-102 Mechanical behaviors

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

x D)

Weight 0.65 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 23 W

NOTE
EM6TA/EM6FA boards have the same functions as EM6T/EM6F boards. The only difference is that
EM6TA/EM6FA boards support IEEE 1588v2 but EM6T/EM6F boards do not.

3.10.1 Version Description

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is SL91.

3.10.2 Application
EM6F/EM6FA/EM6T/EM6TA boards receive and transmit Ethernet services or carry MPLS
tunnels. The selection of EM6F, EM6FA, EM6T, or EM6TA boards depends on desired port
types.

NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 980, configure EM6F/EM6FA/EM6T/EM6TA boards only when Ethernet ports on
system control, switching, and timing boards cannot meet customers' requirements.

Receiving and Transmitting Ethernet Services

EM6F/EM6FA/EM6T/EM6TA boards apply to OptiX RTN 980 NEs to receive and transmit
FE/GE services over Integrated IP radio. The FE/GE services come from customer premises or
Layer 2 networks.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159

Figure 3-49 Application scenario of EM6F/EM6FA/EM6T/EM6TA boards (1)

IP radio network

FE/GE IF IF
EM6x CSHN CSHN EM6x FE/GE
board board

OptiX RTN 980 EM6x: EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA

NOTE

l IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working
in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, Ethernet services can be native Ethernet
services or ETH PWE3 services.

Carrying MPLS Tunnels

EM6F/EM6FA/EM6T/EM6TA boards carry MPLS tunnels when required, allowing MPLS/
PWE3 services traversing radio networks and regional backhaul networks to be transmitted in
end-to-end mode.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160

Figure 3-50 Application scenario of EM6F/EM6FA/EM6T/EM6TA boards (2)

IF
CSHN EM6x FE/GE
board

MPLS tunnel
PW1
...
PWn

OptiX RTN 980 EM6x: EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA

NOTE

l IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working
in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l If required, create two MPLS tunnels on both the packet radio network and regional backhaul network
so PWE3 services are transmitted on MS-PWs in end-to-end mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be Smart E1 processing boards or Ethernet interface
boards.

3.10.3 Functions and Features

The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE
signals and two GE signals. The GE port on the EM6F/EM6FA can receive/transmit 2xFE optical
signals using FE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical modules.

Table 3-103 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA supports.
The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system
control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions.

Table 3-103 Functions and features

Function and Feature Description

EM6T/EM6TA EM6F/EM6FA

Basic functions Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works

with the packet switching unit to process the received
FE/GE service signals.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161

Function and Feature Description

EM6T/EM6TA EM6F/EM6FA

Port FE electrical Provides four Provides four

specifications port 10/100BASE-T(X) ports. 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.

GE port Provides two Provides two GE ports by

10/100/1000BASE-T(X) using SFP modules of any
ports (fixed). of the following types:
l Dual-fiber
bidirectional FE/GE
optical module
l Single-fiber
bidirectional FE/GE
module
l 10/100/1000BASE-T
(X) GE electrical
module

Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s

Switching mode l Centralized mode

l Distributed mode
NOTE
The centralized and distributed modes are available only for
native E-Line services.
l When a board applies the centralized mode, its carried
native E-Line services must be forwarded by the packet
switching unit of the cooperating system control board,
doubling the backplane-provided bandwidths used in
distributed mode.
l When a board applies the distributed mode, its carried
native E-Line services are forwarded by its switching unit,
resulting in deficiencies in functions that depend on the
packet switching unit of the cooperating system control
board.
l Ethernet services of other types must be forwarded by
system control boards' packet switching units. That is,
only the centralized mode is available for Ethernet
services of other types.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162

Function and Feature Description

EM6T/EM6TA EM6F/EM6FA

Port attributes Working mode l FE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards support

10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-
duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l FE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards
support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
l GE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards support
10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-
duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
l GE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards
support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex,
1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l FE optical ports on EM6F/EM6FA boards support
100M full-duplex.
l GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex and
auto-negotiation.

TAG attributes l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet
port.

Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum length of 9600

bytes.

Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that

function complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Services Native Ethernet l E-Line services

PWE3 Ethernet l E-Line services carried by PWs

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163

Function and Feature Description

EM6T/EM6TA EM6F/EM6FA

LAG Inter-board Supported Supported

LAG

Intra-board Supported Supported

LAG

ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032 v1/v2.

Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

IGMP snooping Supported

LPT Supported Supported

Port mirroring Supported

LLDP Supported

QoS DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying

PHB service classes for service flows based on their
QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried
by the packets.

Complex traffic Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports based

classification on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-
VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities,
S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values
carried by packets.

CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.

Queue Supports the following queue scheduling policies:

scheduling l SP
policies
l WRR
l SP+WRR

Congestion Supports tail drop and weighted random early detection

avoidance (WRED).

Traffic shaping Supports shaping for a specified port, priority queue,

or service flow, and supports a step of 64 kbit/s for the
peak information rate (PIR) and committed
information rate (CIR).

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164

Function and Feature Description

EM6T/EM6TA EM6F/EM6FA

ETH OAM Ethernet service l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

OAM function.
l Supports packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring functions that comply with ITU-T Y.
1731.

Ethernet port Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM

OAM function.

RMON Supported Supported

IEEE 1588v2 Time The EM6T does not The EM6F does not
synchronization support IEEE 1588v2 support IEEE 1588v2
time synchronization but time synchronization but
the EM6TA supports. the EM6FA supports.

Frequency The EM6T does not The EM6F does not

synchronization support IEEE 1588v2 support IEEE 1588v2
frequency frequency
synchronization but the synchronization but the
EM6TA supports. EM6FA supports.

PTP port l Ports on the EM6T l Ports on the EM6F

cannot be used as PTP cannot be used as PTP
ports. ports.
l Ports on the EM6TA l Ports on the EM6FA
can be used as PTP can be used as PTP
ports. ports.
When an NE using When an NE using
an EM6TA board an EM6FA board
works in OC, TC, works in OC, TC,
or BC mode, the or BC mode, the
ports on the ports on the
EM6TA board can EM6FA board can
function as PTP function as PTP
ports. ports.
When an NE using When an NE using
an EM6TA board an EM6FA board
works in TC+BC works in TC+BC
mode, the ports on mode, the ports on
the EM6TA board the EM6FA board
can function as can function as
PTP ports whose PTP ports whose
port type is BC or port type is BC or
TC. TC.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165

Function and Feature Description

EM6T/EM6TA EM6F/EM6FA

1588 ACR The EM6T does not The EM6F does not
support 1588 ACR but the support 1588 ACR but the
EM6TA supports. EM6FA supports.

Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet Synchronous Ethernet

(not supported by SFP
electrical modules)

Clock Supports the following clock protection schemes:

protection l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN Inband DCN Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.

O&M Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports

Warm reset and Supported Supported

cold reset

Board Supported Supported

manufacturing
information
query

Board power Supported Supported

consumption
information
query

Board voltage Supported Supported

detection

Board Supported Supported

temperature
detection

Query of SFP Not supported Supported

module
information

3.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T/EM6TA, and it serves as an
example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-51 Functional block diagram

Backplane
GE signal
GE signal
GE signal
Control signal Ethernet Ethernet
access unit
Ethernet signal Logic signal
processing processing Packet switching unit
unit unit
FE signal Control signal
access unit
FE signal
FE signal

Control bus of the board

Control bus
Logic System control and
control unit communication unit

+3.3 V power supplied to the Power -48 V1

board supply unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied to some I/O
circuits on the board +3.3 V

Clock signal provided to the Clock unit System clock signal

other units on the board

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-104 Signal processing in the receive direction

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 GE signal access l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals.

unit/FE signal access l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
unit conversion for GE/FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement
for frame signals.

2 Ethernet processing l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data

unit frames.
l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing
unit.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

3 Logic processing Transmits Ethernet data frames to the main and standby
unit packet switching units.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-105 Signal processing in the transmit direction

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing unit l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet
switching unit.
l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.

2 Ethernet processing l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.

unit l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports
based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data
frames.

3 GE signal access l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC

unit/FE signal access code computing, and Ethernet performance
unit measurement.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/
FE signals through Ethernet ports.

Control Signal Processing

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over the
control bus on the board.

The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication units over the
system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and
communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit.
The command response reported by each unit on the board, and the alarms and performance
events are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control
unit.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and then supplies the +3.3 V power
to some I/O circuits on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.10.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-52 Front panel of the EM6T

EM6T

PROG
STAT

SRV

GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4

Figure 3-53 Front panel of the EM6TA

EM6TA

PROG
STAT

SRV

GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4

Figure 3-54 Front panel of the EM6F

EM6F

LINK1
LINK2
PROG
STAT

SRV

GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4

Figure 3-55 Front panel of the EM6FA

EM6FA

PROG
STAT

SRV
L/A1
L/A2

GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169

Indicators

Table 3-106 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The system is working properly.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.

PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board during
100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green) l When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
ms intervals power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loading

upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

LINK1a On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and is

not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (green) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170

Indicator State Meaning

Off The GE1 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.

LINK2a On (green) The GE2 port is connected correctly and is

not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (green) The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Off The GE2 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.

Table 3-107 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The system is working properly.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.

PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board during
100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green) l When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171

Indicator State Meaning

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
ms intervals power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red) The memory self-check fails or loading

upper layer software fails during the power-
on or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost
during the running process of the board.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.

L/A1a On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and is

not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Off The GE1 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.

L/A2a On (green) The GE2 port is connected correctly and is

not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (yellow) The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Off The GE2 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.
NOTE
a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.

Ports

Table 3-108 Description of the ports on the EM6T/EM6TA

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding

Cable

GE1 GE service port (fixed RJ45 5.9 Network Cable

electrical port)
GE2

FE1 FE service port

FE2

FE3

FE4

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172

Table 3-109 Description of the ports on the EM6F/EM6FA

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding

Cable

GE1 GE service port (using SFP RJ45 SFP electrical 5.9 Network Cable/5.5
modules) module/LC SFP optical Fiber Jumper
GE2 module

FE1 FE service port RJ45 5.9 Network Cable

FE2

FE3

FE4

NOTE
On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond to
PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.

The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA complies with

the 10/100BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T/
EM6TA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service
ports on the EM6F/EM6FA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP
electrical modules are used. All service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X
modes. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-110 and Table 3-111. For the front
view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-56.

Figure 3-56 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-110 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A

(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A

(-)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B

(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C

(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C

(-)

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B

(-)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D

(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D

(-)

Table 3-111 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B

(+)

2 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B

(-)

3 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A

(+)

4 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D

(+)

5 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D

(-)

6 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A

(-)

7 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C

(+)

8 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C

(-)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
3-112.

Table 3-112 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector

Indicator State Meaning

LINK (green) On The link is working properly.

Off The link is interrupted.

ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is transmitting or receiving

data.

Off The port is not transmitting or

receiving data.

When the SFP ports on the EM6F/EM6FA function as optical ports, optical modules are required.
l When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used to provide ports, one SFP
optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-57, in
which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. One optical fiber
is connected to each port.
l When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used to provide ports, one optical
module provides only the port on the left. This port is an optical port that can receive and
transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to this port.

Figure 3-57 Ports of an SFP optical module

TX RX

3.10.6 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the EM6T/
EM6F on the NMS are the same as the physical slots.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175

Figure 3-58 Slots for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 14 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 11 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 12 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 9 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 10 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 8 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Figure 3-59 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 14 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 11 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 12 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 9 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 10 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 8 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)

Table 3-113 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5 >
Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 8 and
10 > Slots 7 and 9

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176

3.10.7 Types of SFP Modules

The FE/GE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) ports on the EM6F/EM6FA support multiple
types of SFP modules.

Table 3-114 Types of SFP modules that the FE/GE port supports

Category Part Number Type Wavelength and

Transmission
Distance

Dual-fiber 34060286 1000Base-SX 850 nm, 0.5 km

bidirectional GE
module 34060473 1000Base-LX 1310 nm, 10 km

34060298 1000BASE-VX 1310 nm, 40 km

34060513 1550 nm, 40 km

34060360 1000BASE-ZX 1550 nm, 80 km

Single-fiber 34060475 1000BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1490 nm;

bidirectional GE receive: 1310 nm
module 10 km

34060470 1000BASE-BX-U Transmit: 1310 nm;

receive: 1490 nm
10 km

34060540 1000BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1490 nm;

receive: 1310 nm
40 km

34060539 1000BASE-BX-U Transmit: 1310 nm;

receive: 1490 nm
40 km

Dual-fiber 34060287 100BASE-FX 1310 nm, 2 km

bidirectional FE
module 34060276 100BASE-LX 1310 nm, 15 km

34060281 100BASE-VX 1310 nm, 40 km

34060282 100BASE-ZX 1550 nm, 80 km

Single-fiber 34060364 100BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1550 nm;

bidirectional FE receive: 1310 nm
module 15 km

34060363 100BASE-BX-U Transmit: 1310 nm;

receive: 1550 nm
15 km

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177

Category Part Number Type Wavelength and

Transmission
Distance

34060329 100BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1550 nm;

receive: 1310 nm
40 km

34060328 100BASE-BX-U Transmit: 1310 nm;

receive: 1550 nm
40 km

Electrical 34100052 10/100/1000BASE-T -

module (X)

NOTE
For the specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 3-116-Table 3-120 in 3.10.8 Technical
Specifications.

The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes
in the bar codes of EM6F boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board
name in a bar code. The bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA does not contain a board feature code.

Table 3-115 Board feature code of the EM6F

Board Feature Code Module Type Part Number of the

Module

01 1000BASE-SX 34060286

02 1000BASE-LX 34060473

03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) 34100052

10 100BASE-FX 34060287

11 100BASE-LX 34060276

3.10.8 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of FE/GE Optical Ports

The FE/GE optical ports on the EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the
main specifications for the FE/GE optical ports.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178

NOTE

Table 3-116 GE optical interface performance(two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance

transmission)

Item Performance

Classification code 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 1000BASE-LX (10 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm) 850 1310

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000

Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode

Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Average optical output -9 to -3 -9 to -3

power (dBm)

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -17 -20

Overload (dBm) 0 -3

Extinction ratio (dB) 9.5 9.5

Table 3-117 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)

Item Performance

Classification code 1000BASE-VX (40 1000BASE-VX (40 1000BASE-ZX (80

km) km) km)

Nominal wavelength (nm) 1310 1550 1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000 1000 1000

Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Transmission distance (km) 40 40 80

Operating wavelength (nm) 1270 to 1350 1480 to 1580 1500 to 1580

Average optical output power -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -2 to +5

(dBm)

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -23 -22 -22

Overload (dBm) -3 -3 -3

Extinction ratio (dB) 9 9 9

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179

Table 3-118 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)

Item Performance

1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE-

BX-D (10 km) BX-U (10km) BX-D (40 km) BX-U (40km)

Nominal wavelength (nm) Tx: 1490 Tx: 1310 Tx: 1490 Tx: 1310
Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000 1000 1000 1000

Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Transmission distance (km) 10 10 40 40

Operating wavelength (nm) Tx: 1480 to 1500 Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1260 to 1360 Tx: 1480 to 1500
Rx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to
1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 1360
1500

Average optical output power -9 to -3 -9 to -3 -3 to +3 -3 to +3

(dBm)

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

Overload (dBm) -3 -3 -3 -3

Extinction ratio (dB) 6 6 6 6

Table 3-119 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)

Item Performance

100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX 100BASE-VX 100BASE-ZX

(2 km) (15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 100 100 100 100

Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Transmission distance (km) 2 15 40 80

Operating wavelength (nm) 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

Average optical output power -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -30 -28 -34 -34

Overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Extinction ratio (dB) 10 8.2 10 10.5

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180

Table 3-120 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)

Item Performance

Classification 100BASE-BX- 100BASE-BX- 100BASE-BX- 100BASE-BX-

code D (15 km) U (15 km) D (40 km) U (40 km)

Nominal Tx: 1550 Tx: 1310 Tx: 1550 Tx: 1310

wavelength Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550
(nm)

Nominal bit rate 100 100 100 100

(Mbit/s)

Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Transmission 15 15 40 40
distance (km)

Operating Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to

wavelength 1580 1360 1580 1360
(nm) Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to
1360 1580 1360 1580

Average optical -15 to -8 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

output power
(dBm)

Receiver -32 -32 -32 -32

sensitivity
(dBm)

Overload (dBm) -8 -8 -10 -10

Extinction ratio 8.5 8.5 10 10

(dB)

Performance of GE Electrical Ports

The GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the GE electrical ports.

Table 3-121 GE electrical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181

Item Performance

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ45

Performance of FE Electrical Ports

The FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the FE electrical ports.

Table 3-122 FE electrical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)

100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ45

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-123 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

EM6T EM6TA EM6F EM6FA

Dimensions(H x 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

W x D)

Weight 0.37 kg 0.40 kg 0.40 kg 0.40 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W

Power consumption of the EM6TA: < 16.2 W

Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W

Power consumption of the EM6FA: < 15.4 W

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182

3.11.1 Version Description

The functional version of EG4/EG4P boards is SL91.

3.11.2 Application
EG4/EG4P boards receive and transmit GE services or carry Multiprotocol Label Switching
(MPLS) tunnels. Because one EG4P board provides two power-over-Ethernet ports, EG4P
boards can also build networks in conjunction with OptiX RTN 310/380.

Receiving and Transmitting Ethernet Services

EG4/EG4P boards apply to OptiX RTN 980 NEs to receive and transmit Ethernet services over
Integrated IP radio. The GE services come from user-side equipment (such as base stations,
routers, and switches) or Layer 2 networks.

Figure 3-60 Application scenario of EG4/EG4P boards (1)

IP radio network

EG4/ IF IF EG4/
GE CSHN CSHN GE
EG4P board board EG4P

OptiX RTN 980

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183

NOTE

l The IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards
working in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l In the preceding figure, if transmitted over Integrated IP radio, Ethernet services can be native Ethernet
services or ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services.

Carrying MPLS Tunnels

EG4/EG4P boards can carry MPLS tunnels when required, allowing MPLS/PWE3 services
traversing radio networks and regional backhaul networks to be transmitted in end-to-end mode.

Figure 3-61 Application scenario of EG4/EG4P boards (2)

IF EG4/
CSHN GE
board EG4P

MPLS Tunnel
PW1
...
PWn

OptiX RTN 980

NOTE

l The IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards
working in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l If required, two MPLS tunnels can be created on both the packet radio network and regional backhaul
network, so PWE3 services can be transmitted on multi-segment pseudo wires (MS-PWs) in end-to-
end mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure can be either Smart E1 processing boards or Ethernet
interface boards.

Working with OptiX RTN 310s/380s

EG4P boards provide electrical GE ports that can supply power over Ethernet to full-outdoor
OptiX RTN 310s/380s. Cooperation between EG4P boards and OptiX RTN 310s/380s increases
service convergence capabilities of OptiX RTN 980s.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184

Figure 3-62 Application scenario of EG4/EG4P boards (3)

RTN radio network

-48V IF
EG4P CSHN
GE board

-48V

OptiX RTN 310/380 OptiX RTN 980

NOTE

l One EG4P board can supply power to a maximum of two OptiX RTN 310s/OptiX RTN 380s.
l One OptiX RTN 980 can supply power to a maximum of 14 OptiX RTN 310s/OptiX RTN 380s.
l An OptiX RTN 980 can be connected to a maximum of 14 ODUs+OptiX RTN 310s/OptiX RTN 380s.

3.11.3 Functions and Features

EG4/EG4P boards receive/transmit, process, and converge 4xGE service signals. They also can
receive/transmit 2xFE optical signals using FE SFP optical modules installed at their SFP ports.

Table 3-124 lists the functions and features supported by EG4/EG4P boards. EG4/EG4P boards
implement Ethernet service functions by working with packet switching units on the system
control, switching, and timing boards.

Table 3-124 Functions and features that EG4/EG4P boards support

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Receives/Transmits GE service

signals, and processes these signals by
working with the packet switching
unit.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185

Function and Feature Description

Port specifications GE port Provides four GE ports.

l Provides two fixed GE electrical
ports (through which EG4P boards
support power-over-Ethernet).
l Provides two fixed GE electrical
ports or two SFP optical ports.
Supports the following types of
SFP modules:
Dual-fiber bidirectional FE/GE
optical module
Single-fiber bidirectional FE/
GE module

Backplane bus bandwidth 2.5 Gbit/s for slots 1 to 6 and 1 Gbit/s

for slots 7 to 14

Switching mode Centralized mode

NOTE
When a board works in centralized mode,
all Ethernet services carried on the board
must be forwarded by the packet switching
unit of the cooperating system control
board.

Port attributes Working mode l GE electrical ports support 10M/

100M/1000M full-duplex and
auto-negotiation.
l GE optical ports support 1000M
full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
l FE optical ports support 100M full-
duplex.

Tag attributes l The tag attribute can be tag aware,

access, or hybrid.
l Sets and queries the tag attribute of
a port.

Jumbo frames Supports jumbo frames with a

maximum length of 9600 bytes.

Traffic control Supports port-based traffic control that

complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186

Function and Feature Description

Services Native Ethernet services l E-Line services

Port-based E-line services
VLAN-based E-line services
E-Line services carried by
QinQ links
l E-LAN services
E-LAN services based on IEEE
802.1d bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE
802.1q bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE
802.1ad bridges

PWE3 Ethernet services l E-Line services carried by PWs

l E-Aggr services carried by PWs
l E-LAN services carried by PWs,
that is, virtual private LAN
services (VPLSs), supported only
when the system control,
switching, and timing board is an
SLB2CSHN board

Link aggregation group Inter-board LAG Supported

(LAG)
Intra-board LAG Supported

Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) Supported (complies with ITU-T G.

8032 v1/v2)

MPLS functions Refer to the description of MPLS/

PWE3 functions provided in the
PWE3 functions sections about system control,
switching, and timing boards.

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Supports Multiple Spanning Tree

Protocol (MSTP) that runs only
Common and Internal Spanning Tree
(CIST) instances. This type of MSTP
provides the same functions as Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).

IGMP snooping Supported

Link-state pass through (LPT) Supported

Port mirroring Supported

LLDP Supported

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187

Function and Feature Description

IEEE 1588v2 clock Time synchronization Supported

Frequency Supported
synchronization

Precision Time Protocol l The Ethernet ports of EG4/EG4P

(PTP) port boards can work as PTP ports if the
NEs housing the boards work in
ordinary clock (OC), boundary
clock (BC), or transparent clock
(TC) mode.
l The Ethernet ports of EG4/EG4P
boards can work as PTP BC ports
or PTP TC ports if the NEs housing
the boards work in TC+BC mode.

Quality of service (QoS) DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification

by specifying per-hop behaviors
(PHBs) for traffic flows based on their
QoS information, such as C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP
values, or MPLS EXP values.

Complex traffic Supports traffic classification based on

classification the following information carried by
packets: C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs,
C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN
priorities, or DSCP values.

Committed access rate Provides the CAR function for traffic

(CAR) flows at ports.

Shaping Supports traffic shaping for a specific

port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.

Queue scheduling l Strict-priority (SP)

policies l Weighted round robin (WRR)
l SP+WRR

Congestion avoidance Supports tail drop and weighted

random early detection (WRED).

Traffic shaping Supports shaping for a specified port,

priority queue, or service flow, and
supports a step of 64 kbit/s for the peak
information rate (PIR) and committed
information rate (CIR).

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188

Function and Feature Description

ETH OAM functions Ethernet service OAM l Supports ETH OAM functions that
comply with IEEE 802.1ag.
l Supports frame loss measurement,
frame delay measurement, and
delay variation measurement
functions that comply with ITU-T
Y.1731.

Ethernet port OAM Supports ETH OAM functions that

comply with IEEE 802.3ah.

Remote network monitoring (RMON) Supported

Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet

Clock protection l Protection implemented by

providing clock sources with
different priorities
l Protection implemented by
running the Synchronization Status
Message (SSM) protocol
l Protection implemented by
running the extended SSM
protocol

Data communication Inband DCN Each port provides one inband DCN
network (DCN) channel.

Power over Ethernet Number of ports 2

(available only on EG4P supporting power over
boards) Ethernet

Enabling/Disabling Software controlled

power over Ethernet

Power protection Supported

Operation and Loopback l Supports inloops at the PHY layer

management of Ethernet ports.
l Supports inloops at the MAC layer
of Ethernet ports.

Warm and cold resetting Supported

Manufacturer Supported
information query

Power consumption Supported

query

Voltage monitoring Supported

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189

Function and Feature Description

Temperature monitoring Supported

SFP module information Supported

query

3.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how the function units of an EG4/EG4P board process GE signals.

Function Block Diagram

EG4 boards process GE signals in the same way as EG4P boards process GE signals. The only
difference is that EG4 boards do not support power over Ethernet.

Figure 3-63 EG4P board function block diagram

Backplane

GE signal
access GE
GE optical signal
unit signal Ethernet Ethernet
GE electrical signal Ethernet signal Logic signal
processing processing Packet switching unit
Management unit unit
control signal
Transf
ormer

GE signal and
power signal
Control bus of
the board

Control bus
Logic System control and
control unit communication unit

Power over Ethernet Unit

Current- Combining/ -48 V 1

DC-DC
limiting Soft-start
module -48 V 2
circuit circuit

+3.3 V power
+3.3 V
supplied to the board

Clock signal provided to System clock signal

Clock unit
other units on the board

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-125 Signal processing in the receive direction of an EG4P board

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 GE signal access unit l Receives GE signals.

l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for GE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
cyclic redundancy check (CRC), and Ethernet
performance measurement for frame signals.

2 Ethernet processing l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data

3 Logic processing Transmits Ethernet data frames to the main and standby
unit packet switching units.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-126 Signal processing in the transmit direction of an EG4P board

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing unit l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet
switching unit.
l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.

2 Ethernet processing l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

3 GE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC

code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames.
l GE electrical ports transmit GE electrical signals.
l Power over Ethernet ports couple GE signals and
power signals from the power-over-Ethernet unit, and
transmit the coupled signals.
l GE optical ports convert optical signals into electrical
signals and transmit the electrical signals.

Power-over-Ethernet Unit
The power-over-Ethernet unit consists of a combining/soft-start circuit, a DC-DC module, a
current-limiting circuit, and a coupling transformer. This unit processes signals as follows:

l The unit receives two -48 V power supplies.

l The combining/soft-start circuit combines two power supplies and performs soft-start and
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) filtering for the combined power signals.
l The DC-DC module converts the power voltage to -52.2 V.
l The current-limiting circuit limits the current of the power signals and sends the power
signals to the coupling transformer at each power-over-Ethernet port.
l The coupling transformer combines the power signals and Ethernet service signals and
sends them to an OptiX RTN 310/380 through an Ethernet cable.

Control Signal Processing

The Ethernet processing unit controls the GE signal access unit using management control
signals.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit using the
control bus.

The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units using the system control bus. Specifically, the logic control unit transmits
configuration data and query commands from the main and standby system control and
communication units to other units on the EG4/EG4P; it also transmits response messages,
alarms, and performance events from other units on the EG4/EG4P to the main and standby
system control and communication units.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192

3.11.5 Front Panel

An EG4/EG4P board has indicators, GE service ports, and a power caution label on its front
panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-64 Front panel of an EG4 board

EG4
STAT
SRV
L/A1
L/A2
L/A3
L/A4

OUT1/IN1 OUT2/IN2 1 2 3 4

Figure 3-65 Front panel of an EG4P board

EG4P
STAT

L/A1
L/A2
L/A3
L/A4
SRV

P2
P1

OUT1/IN1 OUT2/IN2 1 2 3/P1 4/P2

Indicators

Table 3-127 Status explanation for indicators on an EG4/EG4P board

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, not created, or not

powered on.

SRV On (green) Services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm has been reported.

On (yellow) A minor alarm has been reported.

Off No service is configured.

L/A1 On (green) Port GE1 is connected correctly but is not

(optical/ receiving or transmitting data.
electrical
port 1) Blinks on (red) and off at 300 Port GE1 has received extremely high
ms intervals optical power (applicable only to an optical
port).

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193

Indicator State Meaning

Blinks on (red) for 300 ms and Port GE1 has received extremely low optical
off for 700 ms at 1000 ms power (applicable only to an optical port).
intervals

Blinks (yellow) Port GE1 is receiving or transmitting data.

Off Port GE1 is not connected or is incorrectly

connected.

L/A2 On (green) Port GE2 is connected correctly but is not

(optical/ receiving or transmitting data.
electrical
port 2) Blinks on (red) and off at 300 Port GE2 has received extremely high
ms intervals optical power (applicable only to an optical
port).

Blinks on (red) for 300 ms and Port GE2 has received extremely low optical
off for 700 ms at 1000 ms power (applicable only to an optical port).
intervals

Blinks (yellow) Port GE2 is receiving or transmitting data.

Off Port GE2 is not connected or is incorrectly

connected.

L/A3 On (green) Port GE3 is connected correctly but is not

(electrical receiving or transmitting data.
port 3)
Blinks (yellow) Port GE3 is receiving or transmitting data.

Off Port GE3 is not connected or is incorrectly

connected.

L/A4 On (green) Port GE4 is connected correctly but is not

(electrical receiving or transmitting data.
port 4)
Blinks (yellow) Port GE4 is receiving or transmitting data.

Off Port GE4 is not connected or is incorrectly

connected.

P1 On (green) Power over Ethernet port 1 is enabled.

Off Power over Ethernet port 1 is disabled or is

working abnormally.

P2 On (green) Power over Ethernet port 2 is enabled.

Off Power over Ethernet port 2 is disabled or is

working abnormally.
NOTE
Indicators P1 and P2 are available only on the front panels of EG4P boards, indicating the power supply
status of power-over-Ethernet ports.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194

Ports

Table 3-128 Ports on an EG4/EG4P board

Port Description Connector Required Cable

Type

OUT1/IN1 FE/GE optical port LC SFP 5.5 Fiber Jumper

optical
OUT2/IN2 module

1 GE service port (fixed electrical RJ45 5.9 Network Cable

port)
2
NOTE
Optical port 1 and electrical port 1 share
one physical channel, and optical port
2 and electrical port 2 share another
physical channel.

3 (EG4) GE service port (fixed electrical RJ45

port)
4 (EG4)

3/P1 (EG4P) GE service port (fixed electrical RJ45 P&E (8-core) cable
port) + Power over Ethernet port provided by the
4/P1 (EG4P) OptiX RTN 310/380
NOTICE
When a power over Ethernet is
connected to a device that is not OptiX
RTN 310/380, the power over Ethernet
function must be disabled. Otherwise,
the peer device may be damaged.

GE electrical ports on EG4/EG4P boards comply with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard in

performance and support the medium dependent interface (MDI), MDI crossover (MDI-X), and
auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Ports 3/P1 and 4/P2 on EG4P boards transmit both Ethernet service
signals and power signals. All GE electrical ports on EG4/EG4P boards use RJ45 connectors.
For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-66. For pin assignments for RJ45
connectors, see Table 3-129 and Table 3-130.

Figure 3-66 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195

Table 3-129 Pin assignments for RJ45 connectors in MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T Power over Ethernet Signal

(EG4P)

Signal Function Signal Functio Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitt BIDA+ Bidirectio BGND Power ground (0 V)

ing data nal data
(+) wire A
(+)

2 TX- Transmitt BIDA- Bidirectio BGND Power ground (0 V)

ing data nal data
(-) wire A (-)

3 RX+ Receiving BIDB+ Bidirectio -48 V Power signal (-48 V)

data (+) nal data
wire B (+)

4 Reserve - BIDC+ Bidirectio BGND Power ground (0 V)

d nal data
wire C (+)

5 Reserve - BIDC- Bidirectio BGND Power ground (0 V)

d nal data
wire C (-)

6 RX- Receiving BIDB- Bidirectio -48 V Power signal (-48 V)

data (-) nal data
wire B (-)

7 Reserve - BIDD+ Bidirectio -48 V Power signal (-48 V)

d nal data
wire D
(+)

8 Reserve - BIDD- Bidirectio -48 V Power signal (-48 V)

d nal data
wire D (-)

Table 3-130 Pin assignments for RJ45 connectors in MDI-X mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T Power over Ethernet Signal

(EG4P)

Signal Function Signal Functio Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving BIDB+ Bidirectio BGND Power ground (0 V)

data (+) nal data
wire B (+)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T Power over Ethernet Signal

(EG4P)

Signal Function Signal Functio Signal Function

2 RX- Receiving BIDB- Bidirectio BGND Power ground (0 V)

data (-) nal data
wire B (-)

3 TX+ Transmitt BIDA+ Bidirectio -48 V Power signal (-48 V)

ing data nal data
(+) wire A
(+)

4 Reserve - BIDD+ Bidirectio BGND Power ground (0 V)

d nal data
wire D
(+)

5 Reserve - BIDD- Bidirectio BGND Power ground (0 V)

d nal data
wire D (-)

6 TX- Transmitt BIDA- Bidirectio -48 V Power signal (-48 V)

ing data nal data
(-) wire A (-)

7 Reserve - BIDC+ Bidirectio -48 V Power signal (-48 V)

d nal data
wire C (+)

8 Reserve - BIDC- Bidirectio -48 V Power signal (-48 V)

d nal data
wire C (-)

An RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
3-131.

Table 3-131 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector

Indicator State Meaning

LINK (green) On The link is working properly.

Off The link is interrupted.

ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is transmitting or receiving

data.

Off The port is not transmitting or

receiving data.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197

EG4/EG4P boards require SFP optical modules to provide GE optical ports.

l When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used, one optical module provides
one OUT port and one IN port. For details, see Figure 3-67, in which OUT represents the
transmit port and IN represents the receive port. One optical fiber is connected to each port.
l When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used, one optical module provides only
port, which can both receive and transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to
this port.

Figure 3-67 Ports of an SFP optical module

OUT IN

Labels
An EG4P board has a power caution label on its front panel.

Power caution labels on EG4P boards instruct you not to remove or install cables while
equipment is powered on, as power-over-Ethernet ports on the EG4P boards have power output.

3.11.6 Valid Slots

An EG4/EG4P board can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 14. Its logical slot on the network
management system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot.

Figure 3-68 Slots for EG4/EG4P boards in a chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 14 (EG4/EG4P)

Slot 11 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 12 (EG4/EG4P)

Slot 9 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 10 (EG4/EG4P)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 8 (EG4/EG4P)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 6 (EG4/EG4P)

Slot 3 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 4 (EG4/EG4P)

Slot 1 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 2 (EG4/EG4P)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198

Figure 3-69 Logical slots of EG4/EG4P boards on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 14 (EG4/EG4P)

Slot 11 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 12 (EG4/EG4P)

Slot 9 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 10 (EG4/EG4P)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 8 (EG4/EG4P)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 6 (EG4/EG4P)

Slot 3 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 4 (EG4/EG4P)

Slot 1 (EG4/EG4P) Slot 2 (EG4/EG4P)

Table 3-132 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5 >
Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 8 and
10 > Slots 7 and 9

NOTE

When working with an SLB2CSHN board, if an EG4/EG4P board is inserted in any of slots 1 to 6, the backplane
bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s; if an EG4/EG4P board is inserted in any of slots 7 to 14, the backplane bandwidth is
1.0 Gbit/s. It is recommended to insert EG4/EG4P boards in slots 1 to 6.

3.11.7 Types of SFP Modules

FE/GE SFP ports on EG4/EG4P boards support multiple types of SFP modules.

EG4 and EG4P boards support the same types of optical modules.

Table 3-133 Types of SFP modules that FE/GE ports support

Category Part Number Type Wavelength and

Transmission
Distance

Dual-fiber 34060286 1000BASE-SX 850 nm, 0.5 km

bidirectional GE
module 34060473 1000BASE-LX 1310 nm, 10 km

34060298 1000BASE-VX 1310 nm, 40 km

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199

Category Part Number Type Wavelength and

Transmission
Distance

34060513 1550 nm, 40 km

34060360 1000BASE-ZX 1550 nm, 80 km

Single-fiber 34060475 1000BASE-BX-D Transmit wavelength:

bidirectional GE 1490 nm; receive
module wavelength: 1310 nm
10 km

34060470 1000BASE-BX-U Transmit wavelength:

1310 nm; receive
wavelength: 1490 nm
10 km

34060540 1000BASE-BX-D Transmit wavelength:

1490 nm; receive
wavelength: 1310 nm
40 km

34060539 1000BASE-BX-U Transmit wavelength:

1310 nm; receive
wavelength: 1490 nm
40 km

Dual-fiber 34060287 100BASE-FX 1310 nm, 2 km

bidirectional FE
module 34060276 100BASE-LX 1310 nm, 15 km

34060281 100BASE-VX 1310 nm, 40 km

34060282 100BASE-ZX 1550 nm, 80 km

Single-fiber 34060364 100BASE-BX-D Transmit wavelength:

bidirectional FE 1550 nm; receive
module wavelength: 1310 nm
15 km

34060363 100BASE-BX-U Transmit wavelength:

1310 nm; receive
wavelength: 1550 nm
15 km

34060329 100BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1550 nm;

receive: 1310 nm
40 km

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200

Category Part Number Type Wavelength and

Transmission
Distance

34060328 100BASE-BX-U Transmit: 1310 nm;

receive: 1550 nm
40 km

NOTE
For specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 3-135 to Table 3-139 in 3.11.8 Technical
Specifications.

The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by feature codes in the
bar codes of EG4/EG4P boards. A feature code refers to the number next to the board name in
a bar code.

Table 3-134 Feature codes of EG4/EG4P boards

Feature Code Module Type Part

Number
of the
Module

01 1000Base-SX 34060286

02 1000Base-LX 34060473

10 100BASE-FX 34060287

11 100BASE-LX 34060276

3.11.8 Technical Specifications

This section describes board specifications, including the Ethernet service port performance,
power-over-Ethernet performance, mechanical behaviors, and power consumption.

FE/GE Optical Port Performance

FE/GE optical ports on EG4/EG4P boards comply with IEEE 802.3. The following tables list
main specifications for the FE/GE optical ports.

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical ports. Different types of SFP optical modules
can be used to provide GE optical ports with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201

Table 3-135 GE optical interface performance(two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance

transmission)

Item Performance

Classification code 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 1000BASE-LX (10 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm) 850 1310

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000

Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode

Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Average optical output -9 to -3 -9 to -3

power (dBm)

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -17 -20

Overload (dBm) 0 -3

Extinction ratio (dB) 9.5 9.5

Table 3-136 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)

Item Performance

Classification code 1000BASE-VX (40 1000BASE-VX (40 1000BASE-ZX (80

km) km) km)

Nominal wavelength (nm) 1310 1550 1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000 1000 1000

Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Transmission distance (km) 40 40 80

Operating wavelength (nm) 1270 to 1350 1480 to 1580 1500 to 1580

Average optical output power -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -2 to +5

(dBm)

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -23 -22 -22

Overload (dBm) -3 -3 -3

Extinction ratio (dB) 9 9 9

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202

Table 3-137 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)

Item Performance

1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE-

BX-D (10 km) BX-U (10km) BX-D (40 km) BX-U (40km)

Nominal wavelength (nm) Tx: 1490 Tx: 1310 Tx: 1490 Tx: 1310
Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000 1000 1000 1000

Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Transmission distance (km) 10 10 40 40

Operating wavelength (nm) Tx: 1480 to 1500 Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1260 to 1360 Tx: 1480 to 1500
Rx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to
1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 1360
1500

Average optical output power -9 to -3 -9 to -3 -3 to +3 -3 to +3

(dBm)

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

Overload (dBm) -3 -3 -3 -3

Extinction ratio (dB) 6 6 6 6

Table 3-138 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)

Item Performance

100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX 100BASE-VX 100BASE-ZX

(2 km) (15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 100 100 100 100

Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Transmission distance (km) 2 15 40 80

Operating wavelength (nm) 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

Average optical output power -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -30 -28 -34 -34

Overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Extinction ratio (dB) 10 8.2 10 10.5

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203

Table 3-139 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)

Item Performance

Classification 100BASE-BX- 100BASE-BX- 100BASE-BX- 100BASE-BX-

code D (15 km) U (15 km) D (40 km) U (40 km)

Nominal Tx: 1550 Tx: 1310 Tx: 1550 Tx: 1310

wavelength Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550
(nm)

Nominal bit rate 100 100 100 100

(Mbit/s)

Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Transmission 15 15 40 40
distance (km)

Operating Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to

wavelength 1580 1360 1580 1360
(nm) Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to
1360 1580 1360 1580

Average optical -15 to -8 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

output power
(dBm)

Receiver -32 -32 -32 -32

sensitivity
(dBm)

Overload (dBm) -8 -8 -10 -10

Extinction ratio 8.5 8.5 10 10

(dB)

GE Electrical Port Performance

GE electrical ports on EG4/EG4P boards comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
main specifications for the GE electrical ports.

Table 3-140 GE electrical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204

Item Performance

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ45

Power-over-Ethernet Performance
Item Performance

Output voltage -52.2 V

Maximum power output of a port 55 W

Mechanical Behaviors

Table 3-141 Mechanical behaviors

Item Performance

EG4 EG4P

Dimensions (H x W x D) 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight 0.3 kg 0.45 kg

Power Consumption

Table 3-142 Power consumption

Board Power Consumption (W)

EG4 <6

EG4P l < 20 W (connected to two OptiX RTN

310s)
l < 14.7 W (connected to one OptiX RTN
310)
l < 9.3 W (with no OptiX RTN 310
connected)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205

3.12.1 Version Description

The functional version of the EMS6 is SL91.

3.12.2 Application
EMS6 boards transmit Ethernet services on TDM radio networks or native Ethernet services
from Hybrid radio networks through third-party SDH optical networks.

Transmitting Ethernet Services over SDH/PDH Radio

If OptiX RTN 980 NEs transmit Ethernet services over SDH/PDH radio, EMS6 boards receive,
transmit, encapsulate, and map Ethernet services that come from customer premises or Layer 2
networks.

Figure 3-70 Application scenario of EMS6 boards (1)

OptiX RTN 980 MSTP

NOTE

l IF boards shown in the preceding figure can be TDM IF boards, or general-purpose IF boards or XPIC
IF boards working in SDH radio mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure are STM-1 interface boards.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206

Helping Hybrid Radio Services Traverse Third-Party SDH Optical Networks

If OptiX RTN 980 NEs converge Ethernet services over Hybrid radio and the converged Ethernet
services need to traverse third-party SDH optical networks, EMS6 boards can apply to the NEs
to encapsulate and map converged and locally received Ethernet services.

Figure 3-71 Application scenario of EMS6 boards (2)

Hybrid radio network SDH network

EMS6
IF CSHN
board Service STM-N
board
STM-N

OptiX RTN 980 MSTP Traffic flow

NOTE

l As shown in the preceding figure, the traffic flow is as follows: Hybrid IF board sends received Ethernet
services to the packet switching unit of the CSHN board, the packet switching unit sends the Ethernet
services to the EMS6 board, the EMS6 board encapsulates the Ethernet services into VC-4s and
transmits the VC-4s to the cross-connect unit of the CSHN board, the cross-connect unit grooms the
VC-4s to SDH service ports, and the ports send the VC-4s to the third-party SDH optical network.
l IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working
in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure are STM-1 interface boards.

3.12.3 Functions and Features

The EMS6 receives/transmits 4xFE signals and 2xGE signals from the front panel and 1xGE
packet plane signals from the backplane, and encapsulates these Ethernet signals into
synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) signals to transmit the Ethernet signals on the SDH
network. The EMS6 supports transparent service transmission and Layer 2 switching.
Table 3-143 lists the functions and features that the EMS6 supports.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207

Table 3-143 Functions and features

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Receives/transmits 4xFE signals, 2xGE signals, and

1xGE packet plane signals, and performs EoSDH
processing.

Port specifications FE Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.

electrical
port

GE port Provides two GE ports by using small form-factor

pluggable (SFP) modules of any of the following types:
l 1000Base-SX
l 1000Base-LX
l 1000Base-VX
l 1000Base-ZX
l 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

Port attributes Working l The FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-
mode duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex,
10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-
duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.

TAG l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet

attributes port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.

Jumbo Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length

frame of 9600 bytes.

Traffic Supports the port-based traffic control function that

control complies with IEEE 802.3x.
function

Services Ethernet Supports the EPL services based on ports.

private line
(EPL)
services

Ethernet Supports the following types of EVPL services:

virtual l EVPL services based on port+VLAN
private line
(EVPL) l EVPL services based on QinQ
services

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208

Function and Feature Description

Ethernet Supports the EPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1d

private bridges.
LAN
(EPLAN)
services

Ethernet Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:

virtual l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
private
LAN l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
(EVPLAN)
services

Encapsulation and Encapsulati Supports the following encapsulation formats:

mapping on format l Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)
l High Level Data Link Control (HDLC)
l Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS)

Maximum 4xVC-4
TDM
service
capacity
supported
by the
backplane

Maximum 8
number of
VCTRUN
Ks
supported
by the board

Maximum l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK7: 100 Mbit/s

bandwidth l VCTRUNK8: 622 Mbit/s
supported
by each
VCTRUN
K

Link Supported
capacity
adjustment
scheme
(LCAS)

Link aggregation Inter-board Not supported

group (LAG) LAG

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209

Function and Feature Description

Intra-board Supported
LAG NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support intra-
board LAG.

Ethernet ring protection switching Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T
(ERPS) G.8032/Y.1344.

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Supports the STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP), which comply with IEEE 802.1w.

IGMP Snooping Supported

Link state pass through (LPT)a Supported

NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support LPT.

QoS Traffic Supports the following traffic classification modes:

classificatio l Traffic classification based on ports
n
l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID
+S-VLAN ID

CoS Schedules packets in traffic flows to eight egress

queues of different CoSs by:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value

Committed Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.

access rate
(CAR)

Shaping Supports traffic shaping for a specific port or egress

queue.

Queue Supports the following scheduling policies:

scheduling l SP
policy
l WRR
l SP+WRR

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210

Function and Feature Description

ETH OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support IEEE
802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function.

Remote monitoring (RMON) Supported

Port mirroring Supported

Clock Clock Synchronous Ethernet

source NOTE
Ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports) on the EMS6 board do not
support synchronous Ethernet.

Clock Supports the following clock protection schemes:

protection l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the Synchronization Status
Message (SSM) protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Supports inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
excluding ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports).
l Supports inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
excluding port 8 (bridging port).
l Supports inloops on VC-3 paths.

Traffic Supported
monitoring

Warm reset Supported

and cold
reset

Board Supported
manufactur
ing
information
query

Board Supported
power
consumptio
n
information
query

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211

Function and Feature Description

Board Supported
temperature
detection

NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur on a service access node or an intermediate
transmission network, and instruct the service access node to immediately start the backup network for
communication. The LPT function ensures the normal transmission of important data.

3.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EMS6, using FE/GE signal
processing as an example.

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-72 Functional block diagram of the EMS6

Backplane

Ethernet signal SDH signal

FE signal
FE signal access Ethernet Logic
unit Encapsulation Mapping
processing processing Cross-connect
unit unit
unit unit unit
GE signal
GE signal access
unit
GE signal Packet
switching unit

Management
control signal
Control signal of the board

Logic Control bus System control and

control communication unit
unit
-48 V1
+3.3 V power supplied Power
to the board supply unit -48 V2
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to certain auxiliary +3.3 V
circuits on the board

Clock signal provided to the Clock unit System clock signal

other units on the board

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-144 Signal processing in the receive direction

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 FE/GE signal access l Receives FE/GE signals. If GE signals are received

unit through a GE optical port, O/E conversion is required.
l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE/GE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code processing, and
Ethernet performance measurement for frames.

2 Ethernet processing l Receives Ethernet signals from the FE/GE signal

unit access unit and GE signals from the packet switching
unit.
l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic
classification and committed access rate (CAR)
control, for Ethernet data frames based on service
types.
l Processes tags based on service types.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames based on service types.

3 Encapsulation unit Performs the High Level Data Link Control (HDLC),
Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS), or Generic Framing
Procedure (GFP) encapsulation for Ethernet frames.

4 Mapping unit Maps encapsulated Ethernet data frames into VC-12s,

VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.

5 Logic processing Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to

unit the cross-connect unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-145 Signal processing in the transmit direction

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing unit Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

2 Mapping unit Demaps encapsulated Ethernet data frames from VC-12s,

VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.

3 Encapsulation unit Decapsulates Ethernet data frames after they are

demapped.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

4 Ethernet processing l Processes tags based on service types.

unit l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling, for Ethernet data frames.
l Performs Ethernet data frame delimitation, preamble
addition, CRC code computation, and Ethernet
performance measurement.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE/GE signal
access unit or the GE port connected to the packet
switching unit based on egress tags contained in the
Ethernet data frames.

5 FE signal access unit Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for

Ethernet data frames, and transmits generated FE/GE
signals through Ethernet ports. For a GE optical port, the
FE signal access unit needs to perform E/O conversion
before transmitting signals through the GE optical port.

Control Signal Processing

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit using the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit using the
system control bus. The logic control unit issues configuration and query commands from the
system control and communication unit to various units on the board, and reports command
responses, alarms, and performance events reported by various units on the board to the system
control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48
V power into +3.3 V power using the DC-DC module, and supplies the +3.3 V power to the
other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to certain auxiliary circuits on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.12.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, four FE ports, and two small form-factor pluggable (SFP) GE ports on the
front panel.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-73 Front panel of the EMS6

EMS6

LINK1
PROG

LINK2
STAT

ACT1

ACT2
SRV
GE1 GE2
FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4

Indicators

Table 3-146 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board during
100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green) l The upper layer software is being

initialized during the power-on or
resetting process of the board.
l The software is running properly during
the running process of the board.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
ms intervals power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loading

SRV On (green) The system is working normally.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215

Indicator State Meaning

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.

LINK1 On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly.

Blinks on (red) and off at 300 The receive optical power at the GE1 optical
ms intervals port is higher than the upper threshold.

Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700 The receive optical power at the GE1 optical
ms off port is lower than the lower threshold.

Off The GE1 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.

ACT1 Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Off The GE1 port is not receiving or

transmitting data.

LINK2 On (green) The GE2 port is connected correctly.

Blinks on (red) and off at 300 The receive optical power at the GE2 optical
ms intervals port is higher than the upper threshold.

Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700 The receive optical power at the GE2 optical
ms off port is lower than the lower threshold.

Off The GE1 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.

ACT2 Blinking (yellow) The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Off The GE2 port is not receiving or

transmitting data.

Ports

Table 3-147 Description of the ports on the EMS6

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable

GE1 GE service port RJ45 SFP electrical module/LC 5.9 Network Cable/5.5 Fiber
(using SFP SFP optical module Jumper
GE2 modules)

FE1 FE service port RJ45 5.9 Network Cable

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable

FE2

FE3

FE4

NOTE
On the network management system (NMS), GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively,
and FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.

The performance of the FE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the 10/100BASE-T(X)
standard, and the performance of the GE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the
10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. The two types of ports
support the MDI, MDI-X, auto-MDI, and auto-MDI-X modes. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 3-74. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-148 and Table
3-149.

Figure 3-74 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-148 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A

(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A

(-)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B

(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C

(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C

(-)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B

(-)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D

(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D

(-)

Table 3-149 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B

(+)

2 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B

(-)

3 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A

(+)

4 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D

(+)

5 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D

(-)

6 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A

(-)

7 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C

(+)

8 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C

(-)

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
3-150.

Table 3-150 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector

Indicator State Meaning

LINK (green) On The link is working properly.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218

Indicator State Meaning

Off The link is interrupted.

ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is transmitting or receiving

data.

Off The port is not transmitting or

receiving data.

SFP optical modules are used to provide GE ports on the EMS6. One SFP optical module
provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-75, in which TX represents the
transmit port and RX represents the receive port.

Figure 3-75 Ports of an SFP optical module

TX RX

3.12.6 Valid Slots

The EMS6 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EMS6 on the network management
system (NMS) are the same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-76 Slots for the EMS6 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 Slot 14

Slot 11 Slot 12

Slot 9 Slot 10

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8

Slot 15

Slot 5 (EMS6) Slot 6 (EMS6)

Slot 3 (EMS6) Slot 4 (EMS6)

Slot 1 (EMS6) Slot 2 (EMS6)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219

Figure 3-77 Logical slots for the EMS6 on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 Slot 14

Slot 11 Slot 12

Slot 9 Slot 10

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (EMS6) Slot 6 (EMS6)

Slot 3 (EMS6) Slot 4 (EMS6)

Slot 1 (EMS6) Slot 2 (EMS6)

Table 3-151 Slot configuration for the EMS6

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5

3.12.7 Types of SFP Modules

The GE port on the EMS6 board supports multiple types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules.

Table 3-152 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports

Part Number Type

34060286 1000Base-SX

34060473 1000Base-LX

34060298 1000Base-VX (40 km, 1310 nm)

34060513 1000Base-VX (40 km, 1550 nm)

34060360 1000Base-ZX

34100052 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes
in the bar codes of EMS6 boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board
name in a bar code.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220

Table 3-153 Board feature codes of the EMS6

Board Feature Code Module Type

01 1000Base-SX

02 1000Base-LX

03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

NOTE
If the board feature code in the bar code of the EMS6 is empty, no SFP module is installed on the EMS6.

3.12.8 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of GE Optical Ports

The GE optical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the GE optical ports.

Table 3-154 GE optical interface performance(two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance

transmission)

Item Performance

Classification code 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 1000BASE-LX (10 km)

Nominal wavelength (nm) 850 1310

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000

Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode

Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Average optical output -9 to -3 -9 to -3

power (dBm)

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -17 -20

Overload (dBm) 0 -3

Extinction ratio (dB) 9.5 9.5

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221

Table 3-155 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)

Item Performance

Classification code 1000BASE-VX (40 1000BASE-VX (40 1000BASE-ZX (80

km) km) km)

Nominal wavelength (nm) 1310 1550 1550

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000 1000 1000

Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Transmission distance (km) 40 40 80

Operating wavelength (nm) 1270 to 1350 1480 to 1580 1500 to 1580

Average optical output power -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -2 to +5

(dBm)

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -23 -22 -22

Overload (dBm) -3 -3 -3

Extinction ratio (dB) 9 9 9

NOTE

Performance of GE Electrical Ports

The GE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the
main specifications for the GE electrical ports.

Table 3-156 GE electrical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ45

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222

Performance of FE Electrical Ports

The FE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.

Table 3-157 FE electrical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)

100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ45

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-158 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D) 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight 0.50 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EMS6: < 16.5 W

3.13 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.

3.13.1 Version Description

The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91.

3.13.2 Application
EFP8 boards help transmit a small number of Ethernet services on TDM radio networks, or
transmit native Ethernet services from Hybrid radio networks on third-party TDM networks.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223

Helping Transmit Ethernet Services over SDH/PDH Radio

If OptiX RTN 980 NEs transmit Ethernet services over SDH/PDH radio, EFP8 boards receive,
transmit, encapsulate, and map Ethernet services that come from customer premises or Layer 2
networks.

Figure 3-78 Application scenario of EFP8 boards (1)

E1
TDM transmission
TDM radio network network

FE E1
IF IF Service
EFP8 CSHN CSHN
board board board

OptiX RTN 980

NOTE

Helping Hybrid Radio Services Traverse Third-Party TDM Networks

If OptiX RTN 980 NEs converge Ethernet services over Hybrid radio and the converged Ethernet
services need to traverse third-party SDH/PDH networks, EFP8 boards can apply to the NEs to
encapsulate and map converged and locally received Ethernet services.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224

Figure 3-79 Application scenario of EFP8 boards (2)

E1
Hybrid radio network TDM transmission
network

EFP8
IF CSHN
board Service
board E1

OptiX RTN 980 Traffic flow

NOTE

l As shown in the preceding figure, the traffic flow is as follows: Hybrid IF board sends received Ethernet
services to the packet switching unit of the CSHN board, the packet switching unit sends the Ethernet
services to the EFP8 board, the EFP8 board encapsulates the Ethernet services into E1s and transmits
the E1s to the cross-connect unit of the CSHN board, the cross-connect unit grooms the E1s to E1
service ports, and the ports then send the E1s to the third-party TDM network.
l IF boards shown in the preceding figure must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working
in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l Service boards shown in the preceding figure are E1 interface boards.

3.13.3 Functions and Features

The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals
from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the
Ethernet signals on the PDH network.

Table 3-159 lists the functions and features that the EFP8 supports.

Table 3-159 Functions and features

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals and 1xGE packet

plane signals and performs EoPDH processing.

Port FE electrical port: 8

specifications 10/100BASE-T
(X)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225

Function and Feature Description

Port attributes Working mode The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 100M full-
duplex, and auto-negotiation.

TAG attributes l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet

port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.

Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame

length of 2000 bytes.

Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that

function complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Services EPL services Supports the EPL services that are based on port.

EVPL services Supports the following types of EVPL services:

l EVPL services based on port+VLAN
l EVPL services based on QinQ

EPLAN services Supports the EPLAN services that are based on IEEE
802.1d bridges.

EVPLAN services Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:

l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad
bridges

Encapsulation Encapsulation Generic framing procedure (GFP)

and mapping format

Maximum number 16
of VCTRUNKs
supported by the
board

Maximum TDM 1xVC-4 (63xE1)

service capacity
supported by the
backplane

Maximum number 16xE1

of E1s that can be
bound with a
single VCTRUNK

Link capacity Supported

adjustment
scheme (LCAS)

LAG Inter-board LAG Not supported

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226

Function and Feature Description

Intra-board LAG Supported

NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support intra-
board LAG.

Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

IGMP snooping function Supported

LPTa Supported
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support LPT.

QoS Traffic l Traffic classification based on ports

classification l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID
+VLAN PRI
l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID
+S-VLAN ID

CoS Grooms packets in traffic flows to eight egress

queues that belong to different service classes based
on the following conditions:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value

CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.

Shaping Supports traffic shaping for queues at ports.

Queue scheduling Supports SP+WRR.

policies

ETH OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) of the EFP8 does not support the
OAM function that complies with IEEE 802.3ah.

RMON Supported

Port mirroring Supported

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227

Function and Feature Description

Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet

NOTE
Ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports) on the EFP8 board do not
support synchronous Ethernet.

Clock protection Supports the following clock protection schemes:

l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
excluding ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports)
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
excluding port 10 (bridging port)
l Inloops on VC-12 paths

Warm reset and Supported

cold reset

Board Supported
manufacturing
information query

Board power Supported

consumption
information query

Board temperature Supported

detection

NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur at a service access node and in an intermediate
transmission network. If a fault is detected, the LPT notifies the equipment that receives the service of
starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, ensuring normal transmission of
important data.

3.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the EFP8.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-80 Functional block diagram of the EFP8

Backplane

Ethernet signal PDH signal

FE signal FE
Ethernet Logic
signal Encapsulation Mapping
processing processing Cross-connect
access unit unit
unit unit unit
unit

Management
control signal
GE signal Packet
switching unit

Control signal of the board

Logic Control bus System control and

control communication unit
unit
-48 V1
+3.3 V power supplied Power
to the board supply unit -48 V2

+3.3 V backup power +3.3 V

supplied to the board

Clock signal provided to the Clock unit System clock signal

other units on the board

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-160 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFP8

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 FE signal access unit l Receives/Transmits FE signals.

l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC code checks, and Ethernet performance
measurement for frame signals.

2 Ethernet processing l Receives/Transmits GE signals from the packet

unit switching unit.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR for Ethernet data frames based on service
categories.
l Processes tags based on service categories.
l Forwards data frames based on service categories.

3 Encapsulation unit Performs GFP encapsulation for Ethernet frames.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

4 Mapping unit l Maps encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtual

concatenation and then encapsulates the data frames
to proper VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.

5 Logic processing
unit

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-161 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFP8

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing unit Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

2 Mapping unit l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Extracts E1 payload from VC-12s and demaps the E1
payload based on E1 virtual concatenation.

3 Encapsulation unit Decapsulates signals after demapping.

4 Ethernet signal l Processes tags based on service categories.

processing unit l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC
code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE signal access
unit or the GE port that is connected to the packet
switching unit according to the egress flag.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

5 FE signal access unit Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for

Ethernet data frames, and sends the generated FE signals
to an Ethernet port.

Control Signal Processing

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE signal access unit by using management control
signals.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board.

The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit over the
system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and
communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit.
The command response reported by each unit on the board, and alarms and performance events
are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control unit.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:

l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.13.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-81 Front panel of the EFP8

EFP8

PROG
STAT

SRV

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231

Indicators

Table 3-162 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board during
100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green) l When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
ms intervals power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loading

SRV On (green) The system is working properly.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232

Ports

Table 3-163 Description of the ports on the EFP8

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable

FE1 to FE port
RJ45 5.9 Network Cable
FE8

The FE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin
assignments for the ports, see Table 3-164 and Table 3-165. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 3-82.

Figure 3-82 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-164 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)

Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+)

4 Reserved -

5 Reserved -

6 RX- Receiving data (-)

7 Reserved -

8 Reserved -

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233

Table 3-165 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)

Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving data (+)

2 RX- Receiving data (-)

3 TX+ Transmitting data (+)

4 Reserved -

5 Reserved -

6 TX- Transmitting data (-)

7 Reserved -

8 Reserved -

The RJ45 port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-166.

Table 3-166 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector

Indicator State Meaning

LINK (green) On The link is working properly.

Off The link is interrupted.

ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is transmitting or receiving

data.

Off The port is not transmitting or

receiving data.

3.13.6 Valid Slots

The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234

Figure 3-83 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EFP8) Slot 14 (EFP8)

Slot 11 (EFP8) Slot 12 (EFP8)

Slot 9 (EFP8) Slot 10 (EFP8)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (EFP8) Slot 8 (EFP8)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (EFP8) Slot 6 (EFP8)

Slot 3 (EFP8) Slot 4 (EFP8)

Slot 1 (EFP8) Slot 2 (EFP8)

Figure 3-84 Logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EFP8) Slot 14 (EFP8)

Slot 11 (EFP8) Slot 12 (EFP8)

Slot 9 (EFP8) Slot 10 (EFP8)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (EFP8) Slot 8 (EFP8)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (EFP8) Slot 6 (EFP8)

Slot 3 (EFP8) Slot 4 (EFP8)

Slot 1 (EFP8) Slot 2 (EFP8)

Table 3-167 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5 >
Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 8 and
10 > Slots 7 and 9

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235

3.13.7 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of FE Electrical Ports

The FE electrical ports on the EFP8 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.

Table 3-168 FE electrical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)

100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ45

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-169 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D) 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight 0.6 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EFP8: < 13.5 W

3.14.1 Version Description

The functional version of the SL1D/SL1DA is SL91.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236

3.14.2 Application
SL1D/SL1DA boards help OptiX RTN 980 NEs converge TDM services from radio networks
before forwarding the services to SDH networks, or help OptiX RTN 980 NEs build SDH
networks together with SDH equipment.

Converging TDM Services from Radio Networks

SL1D/SL1DA boards converge TDM services from radio networks before forwarding the
services to SDH networks.

Figure 3-85 Application scenario of SL1D/SL1DA boards (1)

Radio network SDH network

IF SL1D/
CSHN STM-N
board SL1DA

OptiX RTN 980 MSTP

NOTE

l Converged services shown in the preceding figure can be SDH/PDH services from TDM radio networks
or native E1/STM-1 services from IP radio networks.
l Transmission lines between the OptiX RTN equipment and the SDH network can be configured with
linear MSP.
l OptiX RTN 980 NEs can work as nodes on SDH rings, as shown in Figure 3-86. Services on such
SDH rings can be configured with SNCP.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237

Figure 3-86 Application scenario of SL1D/SL1DA boards (2)

OptiX RTN 980 MSTP

Helping OptiX RTN 980 NEs Build SDH Networks Together with SDH Equipment
OptiX RTN 980 NEs using SL1D/SL1DA boards can build SDH networks together with SDH
equipment. In this scenario, radio links function as dark fibers.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238

Figure 3-87 Application scenario of SL1D/SL1DA boards (3)

SDH network

SL1D/ IF IF SL1D/
STM-N CSHN CSHN STM-N
SL1DA board board SL1DA

OptiX RTN 980 MSTP

NOTE

l IF boards shown in the preceding figure can be TDM IF boards working in SDH radio mode, or general-
purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards working in SDH radio or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.
l SL1DA boards must be installed if K bytes need to be transparently transmitted.
l Radio links can form SDH rings together with SDH fiber links. Services on such SDH rings can be
configured with SNCP.

3.14.3 Functions and Features

The SL1D/ receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals.

Table 3-170 lists the functions and features that the SL1D/ supports.

Table 3-170 Functions and features

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical

signals.

Port Optical ports l Adopts SFP optical modules and supports the
specifications optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.
l The characteristics of all the optical ports comply
with ITU-T G.957.

Electrical ports l Adopts SFP electrical modules.

l The performance of the electrical ports complies
with ITU-T G.703.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239

Function and Feature Description

Protection Linear MSP Supported

SNCP Supported

Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

Clock Supports the following clock protection schemes:

protection l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN Outband DCN Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.

K byte pass-through Supported only by the SL1DA

OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Outloops at optical/electrical ports
l Inloops at optical/electrical ports
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
l Inloops on VC-4 paths

Warm reset and Supported

cold reset

Setting of the Supported

on/off state of a
laser

ALS functiona Supported

In-service Supported
FPGA loading

Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

Board power Supported

consumption
information
query

Detection and Supported

query of SFP
module
information

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 240

NOTE

a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:

3.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one STM-1 optical signal, and it serves as an example to
describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D/SL1DA.

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-88 Functional block diagram of the SL1D/SL1DA

Backplane

Logic processing
Cross-
O/E conversion

processing unit

STM-1 Service bus connect unit

Overhead

unit
unit

STM-1 System control and

Overhead bus communication unit

System control and

Control bus communication unit

Logic control
unit

Power supplied to the +3.3 V

other units on the board

Clock signal provided to the

Clock unit System clock signal
other units on the board

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-171 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D/SL1DA

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.

l Detects R_LOS alarms.
l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 241

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

2 Overhead processing l Restores clock signals.

unit l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the logic processing unit.

3 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Ttransmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the cross-connect unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-172 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D/SL1DA

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 242

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

2 Overhead processing l Sets higher order path overheads.

unit l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.

3 O/E conversion unit Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

Control Signal Processing

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.14.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-1 ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-89 Front panel of the SL1D (with optical ports)

SL1D

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV

TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2

Figure 3-90 Front panel of the SL1DA (with optical ports)

SL1DA

CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV

TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 243

Figure 3-91 Front panel of the SL1D (with electrical ports)

SL1D

SL1D
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2

Figure 3-92 Front panel of the SL1DA (with electrical ports)

SL1DA

LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV

TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2

Indicators

Table 3-173 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

Off The services are not

configured.

LOS1 On (red) The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.

Off The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is free of R_LOS
alarms.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 244

Indicator State Meaning

LOS2 On (red) The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is reporting
the R_LOS alarm.

Off The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is free of
R_LOS alarms.

Ports

Table 3-174 Description of the ports

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding

Cable

TX1 Transmit port of the l SFP optical l SFP optical

first STM-1 port module: LC module: 5.5
l SFP electrical Fiber Jumper
RX1 Receive port of the
module: SAA l SFP electrical
first STM-1 port
straight/female module: 5.6
STM-1 Cable
TX2 Transmit port of the l SFP optical
second STM-1 port module: LC
l SFP electrical
RX2 Receive port of the
module: SAA
second STM-1 port
straight/female

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.14.6 Valid Slots

An SL1D board can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 14. Its logical slot on the network management
system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot. An SL1DA can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 6.
Its logical slot on NMS is the same as its physical slot.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 245

Figure 3-93 Slots for SL1D/SL1DA boards in an IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (SL1D) Slot 14 (SL1D)

Slot 11 (SL1D) Slot 12 (SL1D)

Slot 9 (SL1D) Slot 10 (SL1D)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (SL1D) Slot 8 (SL1D)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (SL1D/SL1DA) Slot 6 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 3 (SL1D/SL1DA) Slot 4 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 1 (SL1D/SL1DA) Slot 2 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Figure 3-94 Logical slots of SL1D/SL1DA boards on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (SL1D) Slot 14 (SL1D)

Slot 11 (SL1D) Slot 12 (SL1D)

Slot 9 (SL1D) Slot 10 (SL1D)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (SL1D) Slot 8 (SL1D)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (SL1D/SL1DA) Slot 6 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 3 (SL1D/SL1DA) Slot 4 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Slot 1 (SL1D/SL1DA) Slot 2 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Table 3-175 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority SL1D: Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and
5 > Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 8
and 10 > Slots 7 and 9
SL1DA: Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3
and 5

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 246

3.14.7 Board Feature Code

The board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.

Table 3-176 Board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA

Feature Code Type of Optical Module Part Number of the

Optical Module

01 Ie-1 34060287

02 S-1.1 34060276

03 L-1.1 34060281

04 L-1.2 34060282

05 STM-1e 34100104

3.14.8 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.

Table 3-177 STM-1 optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

fiber fiber fiber fiber

Transmission distance 2 15 40 80
(km)

Operating wavelength 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
(nm)

Mean launched power -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)

Receiver minimum -30 -28 -34 -34

sensitivity (dBm)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 247

Item Performance

Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Minimum extinction ratio 10 8.2 10 10

(dB)

NOTE

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.

Table 3-178 STM-1 electrical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

Code type CMI

Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair

transmission direction

Impedance (ohm) 75

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-179 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

SL1D SL1DA

Dimensions (H x W x 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight 0.30 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumptionof the SL1D: < 3.4 W

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 248

Power consumption of the SL1DA: < 3.3 W

3.15 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.

3.15.1 Version Description

The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.

3.15.2 Application
ML1/MD1 boards receive and transmit E1 services on OptiX RTN 980 NEs that transmit E1-
carried ATM/CES services in PWE3 mode. The selection of MD1 or ML1 boards depends on
desired port quantities.

NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 980, configure ML1/MD1 boards only if Smart E1 ports on system control, switching,
and timing boards cannot meet customers' requirements.

The ML1/MD1 board are used to:

l Transmit CES/ATM E1 services in PWE3 mode.
l Allow an MPLS tunnel to traverse a TDM network

Transmitting CES/ATM E1 Services in PWE3 Mode

Figure 3-95 Transmitting CES/ATM E1 services in PWE3 mode

MPLS tunnel
PW1
...
PWn

Packet radio network

CES E1
CES E1
ML1/ IF IF ML1/
ATM E1 CSHN CSHN
MD1 board board MD1
ATM E1

OptiX RTN 980

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 249

Allowing an MPLS Tunnel to Traverse a TDM Network

Figure 3-96 Allowing an MPLS tunnel to traverse a TDM network

Payload
PW
Payload MPLS Payload
PW ML_PPP PW
MPLS MPLS
E1
ETH ETH

PSN TDM network PSN

PW1
...
PWn
MPLS Tunnel

E1 E1
IF ML1/M ML1/M ETH
CSHN CSHN FE/GE
board D1 D1 board

OptiX RTN 980

NOTE

IF boards shown in Figure 3-95 and Figure 3-96 must be general-purpose IF boards or XPIC IF boards
working in native E1+Ethernet mode or native STM-1+Ethernet mode.

3.15.3 Functions and Features

The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

Table 3-180 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports.

Table 3-180 Functions and features

Function and Feature Description

ML1 MD1

Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports

flexible configuration of E1 service categories.

E1 service categories Supports the following E1 service categories:

l CES E1
l ATM/IMA E1
l ML-PPP E1

Port 75-ohm/120- 16 32
specifications ohm E1 port

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 250

Function and Feature Description

ML1 MD1

Fractional E1 Supports transparent service transmission at the 64

kbit/s level.

ATM/IMA Maximum 64
number of ATM
services

Maximum 256
number of ATM
connections

ATM traffic Supported

management

ATM Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:

encapsulation l N-to-one VPC
mode
l N-to-one VCC
l One-to-one VPC
l One-to-one VCC

Maximum 31
number of
concatenated
ATM cells

ATM OAM Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level),
including the following functions:
l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect
indication (RDI)
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test

Maximum 16 32
number of IMA
groups

Maximum 16
number of
members in an
IMA group

CES Maximum 16 32
number of
services

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 251

Function and Feature Description

ML1 MD1

Encapsulation Supports the following encapsulation modes:

mode l CESoPSN
l SAToP

Service Point-to-point services

Compression of Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)

vacant slots

Jitter buffering 375-16000

time (us)

Packet loading 125-5000

time (us)

CES ACR Supported

Retiming Supported

MLPPP MLPPP link E1

type

Maximum 16 32
number of PPP
links

Maximum 8 16
number of
MLPPP groups

Maximum 16
number of links
in an MLPPP

Clock Clock source Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the
first or fifth E1 signal.

Clock Supports clock protection based on clock source

protection priorities.

E1 retiming Supported
function

OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

Cold reset and Supported

warm reset

PRBS tests at E1 Supported

ports

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 252

Function and Feature Description

ML1 MD1

Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

Board power Supported

consumption
information
query

3.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-97 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1

Backplane
Logic processing
Signal interface

processing unit

E1
Service

Service GE bus
unit
unit

Packet switching unit

bus
E1

Control bus System control and

communication unit

Logic
control unit

+3.3 V power Power -48 V1

supplied to the board supply unit -48 V2
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to the board +3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the Clock unit System clock signal
other units of the board

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 253

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-181 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Signal interface unit l Receives external E1 signals.

l Matches the resistance.
l Equalizes signals.
l Converts the level.
l Recovers clock signals.
l Buffers the received data.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.

2 Service processing l Frames E1 signals.

unit l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3
services into Ethernet services.

3 Logic processing l Implements the conversion from the internal service

unit bus into the GE bus in the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-182 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing l Receives service signals from the packet switching

unit unit.
l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in the
backplane into the internal service bus.

2 Service processing l Decapsulates service signals.

unit l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the signal interface unit.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 254

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

3 Signal interface unit l Performs HDB3 coding.

l Performs clock re-timing.
l Performs pulse shaping.
l Drives the line.
l Sends E1 signals to a port.

Control Signal Processing

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.15.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-98 Front panel of the ML1

ML1

16
STAT

E1 1
SRV

Figure 3-99 Front panel of the MD1

MD1

16 32
STAT
SRV

1 17

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 255

Indicators

Table 3-183 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

Off The services are not

configured.

Ports

Table 3-184 Description of the ports on the ML1

Port Description Connector Corresponding Cable

Type

1 to 16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

E1 ports the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 256

Table 3-185 Description of the ports on the MD1

Port Description Connector Corresponding Cable

Type

1 to 16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

E1 ports the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

17 to 32 The seventeenth to Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

thirty-second E1 the External Equipment or
ports 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-100 shows the front view of
an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-186 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.

Figure 3-100 Front view of an Anea 96 connector

POS.1

POS.96

Table 3-186 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 The first received E1 25 The first transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

2 The first received E1 26 The first transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

3 The second received E1 27 The second transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

4 The second received E1 28 The second transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

5 The third received E1 29 The third transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

6 The third received E1 30 The third transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

7 The fourth received E1 31 The fourth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 257

Pin Signal Pin Signal

8 The fourth received E1 32 The fourth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

9 The fifth received E1 33 The fifth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

10 The fifth received E1 34 The fifth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

11 The sixth received E1 35 The sixth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

12 The sixth received E1 36 The sixth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

13 The seventh received E1 37 The seventh transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

14 The seventh received E1 38 The seventh transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

15 The eighth received E1 39 The eighth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

16 The eighth received E1 40 The eighth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

17 The ninth received E1 41 The ninth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

18 The ninth received E1 42 The ninth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

19 The tenth received E1 43 The tenth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

20 The tenth received E1 44 The tenth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

21 The eleventh received E1 45 The eleventh transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

22 The eleventh received E1 46 The eleventh transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

23 The twelfth received E1 47 The twelfth transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

24 The twelfth received E1 48 The twelfth transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

49 The thirteenth received E1 73 The thirteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 258

Pin Signal Pin Signal

50 The thirteenth received E1 74 The thirteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

51 The fourteenth received E1 75 The fourteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

52 The fourteenth received E1 76 The fourteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

53 The fifteenth received E1 77 The fifteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

54 The fifteenth received E1 78 The fifteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

55 The sixteenth received E1 79 The sixteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

56 The sixteenth received E1 80 The sixteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

3.15.6 Valid Slots

The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-101 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ML1/MD1) Slot 14 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 11 (ML1/MD1) Slot 12 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 9 (ML1/MD1) Slot 10 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (ML1/MD1) Slot 8 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (ML1/MD1) Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 3 (ML1/MD1) Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 1 (ML1/MD1) Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 259

Figure 3-102 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ML1/MD1) Slot 14 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 11 (ML1/MD1) Slot 12 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 9 (ML1/MD1) Slot 10 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (ML1/MD1) Slot 8 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (ML1/MD1) Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 3 (ML1/MD1) Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 1 (ML1/MD1) Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)

Table 3-187 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5 >
Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 8 and
10 > Slots 7 and 9

3.15.7 Board Feature Code

The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.

Table 3-188 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1

Board Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)

A 75

B 120

3.15.8 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 260

E1 Interface Performance

Table 3-189 E1 interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048

Code pattern HDB3

Impedance (ohm) 75 120

Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair
transmission direction

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-190 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

ML1 MD1

Dimensions (H x W x 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight 0.45 kg 0.50 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W

Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W

3.16 CQ1
CQ1 boards are 4-port channelized STM-1 processing boards.

3.16.1 Version Description

The functional version of CQ1 boards is SL91.

3.16.2 Application
CQ1 boards apply to OptiX RTN 980 NEs to transparently transmit STM-1 services over packet
radio networks. CQ1 boards receive/transmit only channelized STM-1 services.

CQ1 boards are used in the following scenarios:

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 261

l STM-1 services are transparently transmitted over packet radio networks.

l Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) tunnels traverse a TDM network.
l Circuit emulation service (CES) E1 services are converged to channelized STM-1s.

Transparently Transmitting STM-1 Services over Packet Radio Networks

Figure 3-103 Application scenario of CQ1 boards (1)

MPLS Tunnel
PW1
...
PWn

Packet radio network

IF IF
STM-1 CQ1 CSHN CSHN CQ1 STM-1
board board

OptiX RTN 980

Carrying MPLS Tunnels over a TDM Network

Figure 3-104 Application scenario of CQ1 boards (2)

Payload
PW
Payload MPLS Payload
PW ML_PPP PW
MPLS E1 of MPLS
ETH Channelized ETH
STM-1

PSN TDM network PSN

PW1
...
PWn
MPLS Tunnel

STM-1 STM-1
IF ETH
CSHN CQ1 CQ1 CSHN FE/GE
board board

OptiX RTN 980

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 262

Converging CES E1 Services to Channelized STM-1s

Figure 3-105 Application scenario of CQ1 boards (3)

CES E1 ML1/M IF
CSHN
D1 board

PW1
...
PWn
MPL
ST unne
l
Packet radio network
PW1
...
PWn MPLS Tunnel

CES E1 ML1/M IF IF
CSHN
D1 board board
CSHN CQ1 STM-1

IF
board

OptiX RTN 980

NOTE

The IF boards shown in Figure 3-103 to Figure 3-105 must be general-purpose IF boards or cross
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) IF boards working in native E1+Ethernet or native STM-1
+Ethernet mode.

3.16.3 Functions and Features

CQ1 boards receive and transmit four channels of channelized STM-1 optical/electrical signals.

Table 3-191 lists the functions and features supported by CQ1 boards.

Table 3-191 Functions and features that CQ1 boards support

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Receives and transmits four channels

of channelized STM-1 optical/
electrical signals.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 263

Function and Feature Description

Supported packet service types l Circuit emulation service (CES) E1

l ML-PPP E1

Port specifications Optical ports l Use small form-factor pluggable

(SFP) optical modules and support
optical ports of the Ie-1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.
l Comply with ITU-T G.957.

Electrical ports l Use SFP electrical modules.

l Comply with ITU-T G.703.

Fractional E1 Transparently transmits 64 kbit/s CES

services.

CES Maximum number of 252

services

Encapsulation mode l CESoPSN (CESoPSN stands for

circuit emulation services over
packet switch networks)
l SAToP (SAToP stands for
Structure-Agnostic Time Division
Multiplexing over Packet)

Idle timeslot Supported only in CESoPSN mode

compression

Jitter buffering time (us) 875 to 16,000

Packet loading time (us) 125 to 5,000

CES ACR(ACR stands Supported, but the NE can only

for adaptive clock function as a master node
recovery)

Transparent Supported
transmission of SDH
overheads

ML-PPP Type of links carrying E1s in channelized STM-1s

ML-PPP links

Maximum number of 252

supported PPP links

Maximum number of 32
supported ML-PPP
groups

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 264

Function and Feature Description

Maximum number of 16
links in one ML-PPP
group

Clock Clock source l Each line port provides one

channel of SDH line clock signals.
l Each board supports two channels
of E1 clock signals over its STM-1
ports.

Clock protection l Protection implemented by

providing clock sources with
different priorities
l Protection implemented by
running Synchronization Status
Message (SSM) protocol
l Protection implemented by
running extended SSM protocol

SDH line clock retiming Supported

Linear multiplex section protection (MSP) 1:1 linear MSP

DCN Outband DCN Each SDH line port can provide one
data communications channel (DCC)
that is composed of three DCC bytes,
nine DCC bytes, or 12 DCC bytes.

Inband DCN Transmits DCN information over ML-

PPP links.

Operation and Loopback l Supports inloops at STM-1 ports.

maintenance l Supports outloops at STM-1 ports.
l Supports inloops over E1 channels.
l Supports outloops over E1
channels.

Warm and cold resetting Supported

Switching a laser on or Supported

off

Manufacturer Supported
information querying

Power consumption Supported

querying

SFP module information Supported

detecting and querying

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 265

3.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how the function units of a CQ1 board process channelized STM-1 optical
signals.

Function Block Diagram

Figure 3-106 CQ1 board function block diagram

Backplane

Channelized STM-1
STM-1 E1 GE
signal
signal signal signal GE bus
Signal SDH Packet Logic
interface processing processing processing Packet switching unit
unit unit unit unit

Control bus
System control and
communication unit

Logic
Line clock signal control
unit

Line clock signal

Clock unit
Clock signal provided to other units on the System clock signal
board

+3.3 V power supplied to other Power supply -48 V 1

units on the board unit -48 V 2

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-192 Signal processing in the receive direction of a CQ1 board

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Signal interface unit l Receives channelized STM-1 signals.

l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.
l Checks for R_LOS alarms.
l Converts STM-1 optical signals into STM-1 electrical
signals.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 266

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

2 SDH processing unit l Restores clock signals.

l Synchronizes frames and checks for R_LOS and
R_LOF alarms.
l Descrambles signals.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates alarms and
performance events, if any.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates alarms and performance events, if any.
l Checks for changes in Synchronization Status
Messages (SSMs) in the S1 byte and reports the SSM
status to the system control and communication unit.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
(including F1 and serial bytes), DCC bytes, and K
bytes, and transmits the bytes to the logic processing
unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates performance
events, if any.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
alarms and performance events, if any.
l Decapsulates E1 signals from the STM-1 signals.

3 Packet processing l Frames E1 signals.

unit l Performs CES emulation.
l Performs Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol (MP-PPP)
processing.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts them into
Ethernet services.

4 Logic processing l Grooms services from service buses to the GE bus on

unit the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-193 Signal processing in the transmit direction of a CQ1 board

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing l Receives service signals from the packet switching

unit unit.
l Grooms services from the GE bus on the backplane to
service buses.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 267

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

2 Packet processing l Decapsulates service signals.

unit l Restructures CES packets.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the SDH processing unit.

3 SDH processing unit l Multiplexes E1 signals into STM-1 signals.

l Sets higher order path overheads.
l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Scrambles signals.

4 Signal interface unit Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

Control Signal Processing

The CQ1 board is directly controlled by a CPU on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU issues configuration and query commands to other units of the board over the control
bus. These units send command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over
the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane. It then converts
the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power and supplies the +3.3 V power to other units on the
board.

Clock Unit
The clock unit performs the following operations:
l Extracts line clock signals or E1 clock signals and transmits them to the system control and
communication unit.
l Receives system clock signals from the control bus on the backplane and supplies clock
signals to other units on the board.

3.16.5 Front Panel

A CQ1 board has indicators and STM-1 ports on its front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-107 Front panel of a CQ1 board providing optical ports

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
CQ1
STAT

LOS1
LOS2
LOS3
LOS4
SRV

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 268

Figure 3-108 Front panel of a CQ1 board providing electrical ports

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4

CQ1
STAT

LOS1
LOS2
LOS3
LOS4
SRV

Indicators

Table 3-194 Status explanation for indicators on a CQ1 board

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, not

created, or not powered on.

SRV On (green) Services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm has

been reported.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm has

been reported.

Off No service is configured.

LOS1 On (red) The first port has reported an

R_LOS alarm.

Off The first port does not report

any R_LOS alarms.

LOS2 On (red) The second port has reported

an R_LOS alarm.

Off The second port does not

report any R_LOS alarms.

LOS3 On (red) The third port has reported an

R_LOS alarm.

Off The third port does not report

any R_LOS alarms.

LOS4 On (red) The fourth port has reported

an R_LOS alarms.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 269

Indicator State Meaning

Off The fourth port does not

report any R_LOS alarms.

Ports

Table 3-195 Ports on a CQ1 board

Port Description Connector Type Required Cable

OUT1 to OUT4 Transmit ports of the l LC (with an SFP l 5.5 Fiber

first to fourth STM-1 optical module) Jumper for SFP
ports l SAA straight optical modules
female (with an l 5.6 STM-1
IN1 to IN4 Receive ports of the
SFP electrical Cable for SFP
first to fourth STM-1
module) electrical
ports
modules

3.16.6 Valid Slots

A CQ1 board can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 14. Its logical slot on the network management
system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot.

Figure 3-109 Slots for CQ1 boards in a chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (CQ1) Slot 14 (CQ1)

Slot 11 (CQ1) Slot 12 (CQ1)

Slot 9 (CQ1) Slot 10 (CQ1)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CQ1) Slot 8 (CQ1)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (CQ1) Slot 6 (CQ1)

Slot 3 (CQ1) Slot 4 (CQ1)

Slot 1 (CQ1) Slot 2 (CQ1)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 270

Figure 3-110 Logical slots of CQ1 boards on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (CQ1) Slot 14 (CQ1)

Slot 11 (CQ1) Slot 12 (CQ1)

Slot 9 (CQ1) Slot 10 (CQ1)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (CQ1) Slot 8 (CQ1)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (CQ1) Slot 6 (CQ1)

Slot 3 (CQ1) Slot 4 (CQ1)

Slot 1 (CQ1) Slot 2 (CQ1)

Table 3-196 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5 >
Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 8 and
10 > Slots 7 and 9

3.16.7 Types of SFP Modules

STM-1 ports on CQ1 boards support multiple types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules.

Table 3-197 Types of SFP modules that STM-1 ports support

Category Part Number Type Wavelength and

Transmission
Distance

Dual-fiber 34060287 Ie-1 1310 nm, 2 km

bidirectional STM-1
module 34060276 S-1.1 1310 nm, 15 km

34060281 L-1.1 1310 nm, 40 km

34060282 L-1.2 1550 nm, 80 km

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 271

Category Part Number Type Wavelength and

Transmission
Distance

Single-fiber 34060363 S-1.1-BX-U Transmit

bidirectional STM-1 wavelength: 1310
module nm; receive
wavelength: 1550
nm
15 km

34060364 S-1.1-BX-D Transmit

wavelength: 1550
nm; receive
wavelength: 1310
nm
15 km

34060328 L-1.1-BX-U Transmit

wavelength: 1310
nm; receive
wavelength: 1550
nm
40 km

34060329 L-1.1-BX-D Transmit

wavelength: 1550
nm; receive
wavelength: 1310
nm
40 km

Electrical STM-1 34100104 STM-1e Transmission

module distance: 300 m

NOTE
For specifications for each type of SFP module, see STM-1 Optical Interface Performance and STM-1
Electrical Interface Performance in 3.16.8 Technical Specifications.

The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by feature codes in the
bar codes of CQ1 boards. A feature code refers to the number next to the board name in a bar
code.

Table 3-198 Feature codes of CQ1 boards

Feature Code Module Type Part Number of the

Module

01 Ie-1 34060287

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 272

Feature Code Module Type Part Number of the

Module

02 S-1.1 34060276

03 L-1.1 34060281

3.16.8 Technical Specifications

This section describes board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port
performance, mechanical behaviors, and power consumption.

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.

Table 3-199 STM-1 optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

fiber fiber fiber fiber

Transmission distance 2 15 40 80
(km)

Operating wavelength 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
(nm)

Mean launched power -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)

Receiver minimum -30 -28 -34 -34

sensitivity (dBm)

Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Minimum extinction ratio 10 8.2 10 10

(dB)

NOTE

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 273

Table 3-200 STM-1 optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

Classification code S-1.1-BX-D S-1.1-BX-U L-1.1-BX-D L-1.1-BX-U

Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

fiber fiber fiber fiber

Transmission distance 15 15 40 40
(km)

Nominal wavelength (nm) Tx: 1550 Tx: 1310 Tx: 1550 Tx: 1310
Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550

Operating wavelength Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to
(nm) 1580 1360 1580 1360
Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to
1360 1580 1360 1580

Mean launched power -15 to -8 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)

Receiver minimum -32 -32 -32 -32

sensitivity (dBm)

Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8 -10 -10

Minimum extinction ratio 8.5 8.5 10 10

(dB)

NOTE

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.

Table 3-201 STM-1 electrical interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520

Code type CMI

Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair

transmission direction

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 274

Item Performance

Impedance (ohm) 75

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.

Mechanical Behaviors

Table 3-202 Mechanical behaviors

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D) 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight 0.47 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 11.5 W

3.17 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.

3.17.1 Version Description

The SP3S has two functional versions: SL91SP3SVER.B and SL91SP3SVER.C. The SP3D also
has two functional versions: TNH1SP3DVER.B and TNH1SP3DVER.C. The difference
between VER.B and VER.C is that path indication on the front panel is optimized and the board
power consumption is reduced.

3.17.2 Application
SP3S/SP3D boards receive and transmit E1 services on OptiX RTN 980 NEs that transmit E1
services in native mode. The E1 services come from customer premises or TDM networks.

NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 980, configure SP3S/SP3D boards only if E1 ports on system control, switching, and
timing boards cannot meet customers' requirements.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 275

Figure 3-111 Application scenario of SP3S/SP3D boards

Radio network

E1 SP3S/ SP3S/
CSHN IFU2 IFU2 CSHN E1
SP3D SP3D

OptiX RTN 980

3.17.3 Functions and Features

The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

Table 3-203 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports.

Table 3-203 Functions and features

Function and Feature Description

SP3S SP3D

Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals.

Port 75-ohm/120- 16 32
specifications ohm E1 port

Clock Clock source Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the
first or fifth E1 signal.

Clock Supports clock protection based on clock source

protection priorities.

E1 retiming Supported
function

OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

Cold reset and Supported

warm reset

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 276

Function and Feature Description

SP3S SP3D

PRBS tests at E1 Supported

ports

Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

Board power Supported

consumption
information
query

3.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-112 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D

Backplane
Mapping/Demapping

E1 signal Service bus

Logic processing

E1
Interface unit

Codec unit

unit

Cross-connect unit

Control bus
System control and
communication unit

Logic
control unit

+3.3 V power supplied Power -48 V1

to the board supply unit
-48 V2

+3.3 V backup power

+3.3 V
supplied to the board

Clock signal provided to the Clock System clock signal

other units on the board unit

NOTE
The power supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from -48
V power into +3.3 V power.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 277

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-204 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Interface unit External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and

then transmitted to the board.

2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signals.

l Recovers clock signals.
l Detects T_ALOS alarms.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.

3 Mapping/ l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s.

Demapping unit l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.

4 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-205 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 278

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

2 Mapping/ l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

Demapping unit l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects
specific alarms and performance events.
l Extracts E1 signals.

3 Codec unit Performs HDB3 coding.

4 Interface unit E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then

transmitted to an external cable.

Control Signal Processing

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into +3.3
V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. The power
supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from
-48 V power into +3.3 V power.
l Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.17.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-113 Front panel of the SP3SVER.B

SP3S

SP3S
STAT

E1
SRV

1-16

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 279

Figure 3-114 Front panel of the SP3SVER.C

SP3S
16

STAT
SRV
1

Figure 3-115 Front panel of the SP3DVER.B

SP3D

SP3D
21 42
STAT
SRV

1 22

Figure 3-116 Front panel of the SP3DVER.C

SP3D

16 32
STAT
SRV

1 17

Indicators

Table 3-206 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 280

Indicator State Meaning

Off The services are not

configured.

Ports

Table 3-207 Description of the ports on the SP3S(VER.B and VER.C)

Port Description Connector Corresponding Cable

Type

1-16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

E1 ports the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

Table 3-208 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.B

Port Description Connector Corresponding Cable

Type

1-21 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

E1 ports the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

22-42 The seventeenth to Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

thirty-second E1 the External Equipment or
ports 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 980, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1
signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.

Table 3-209 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.C

Port Description Connector Corresponding Cable

Type

1-16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

E1 ports the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 281

Port Description Connector Corresponding Cable

Type

17-32 The seventeenth to Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

thirty-second E1 the External Equipment or
ports 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-117 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-210 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.

Figure 3-117 Front view of an Anea 96 connector

POS.1

POS.96

Table 3-210 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 The first received E1 25 The first transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

2 The first received E1 26 The first transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

3 The second received E1 27 The second transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

4 The second received E1 28 The second transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

5 The third received E1 29 The third transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

6 The third received E1 30 The third transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

7 The fourth received E1 31 The fourth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

8 The fourth received E1 32 The fourth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

9 The fifth received E1 33 The fifth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 282

Pin Signal Pin Signal

10 The fifth received E1 34 The fifth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

11 The sixth received E1 35 The sixth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

12 The sixth received E1 36 The sixth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

13 The seventh received E1 37 The seventh transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

14 The seventh received E1 38 The seventh transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

15 The eighth received E1 39 The eighth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

16 The eighth received E1 40 The eighth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

17 The ninth received E1 41 The ninth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

18 The ninth received E1 42 The ninth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

19 The tenth received E1 43 The tenth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

20 The tenth received E1 44 The tenth transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (-) signal (-)

21 The eleventh received E1 45 The eleventh transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

22 The eleventh received E1 46 The eleventh transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

23 The twelfth received E1 47 The twelfth transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

24 The twelfth received E1 48 The twelfth transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

49 The thirteenth received E1 73 The thirteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

50 The thirteenth received E1 74 The thirteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

51 The fourteenth received E1 75 The fourteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 283

Pin Signal Pin Signal

52 The fourteenth received E1 76 The fourteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

53 The fifteenth received E1 77 The fifteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

54 The fifteenth received E1 78 The fifteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

55 The sixteenth received E1 79 The sixteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

56 The sixteenth received E1 80 The sixteenth transmitted E1

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

3.17.6 Valid Slots

The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-118 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 14 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 11 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 12 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 9 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 10 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 8 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 284

Figure 3-119 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 14 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 11 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 12 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 9 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 10 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 8 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)

Table 3-211 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5 >
Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 8 and
10 > Slots 7 and 9

3.17.7 Board Feature Code

The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.

Table 3-212 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D

Board Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)

A 120

B 75

3.17.8 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 285

E1 Interface Performance

Table 3-213 E1 interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048

Code pattern HDB3

Impedance (ohm) 75 120

Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair
transmission direction

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-214 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

SP3SVER.B SP3SVER.C SP3DVER.B SP3SVER.C

Dimensio 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

ns (H x W
x D)

Weight 0.50 kg 0.40 kg 0.64 kg 0.54 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SP3SVER.B: < 5.7 W

Power consumption of the SP3SVER.C: < 4.8 W

Power consumption of the SP3DVER.B: < 9.6 W

Power consumption of the SP3DVER.C: < 8.3 W

3.18 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 980. One NE can house
only one AUX.

3.18.1 Version Description

The functional version of the AUX is SL91.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 286

3.18.2 Functions and Features

The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one
asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port.

Table 3-215 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports.

Table 3-215 Functions and features

Function and Feature Description

Orderwire phone port 1

Synchronous data port 1

The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its
specifications comply with ITU-T G.703.

Asynchronous data port 1

The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2
kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232.

External alarm port Four inputs and two outputs

Hot swapping function Supported

Board power consumption Supported

information query

Power detection Supported

3.18.3 Working Principle

The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-120 Functional block diagram of the AUX

Backplane

Power
supply unit +3.3 V
Power dip
4-input/2-output alarm port detection signal

One orderwire phone port

Orderwire System bus
64 kbit/s unit Logic control System control and
synchronous data port unit communication unit
19.2 kbit/s
asynchronous data port

Clock unit Clock Board status System control and

signal detection unit communication unit

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 287

Power Supply Unit

l Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on
the AUX.
l Receives and shuts down control signals.

Orderwire Unit
l Supports the input of four channels of alarms.
l Supports the output of two channels of alarms.
l Provides one orderwire port.
l Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port.
l Provides one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port.
NOTE
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit orderwire byte. One port, however, can implement
only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data port and transparent transmission of orderwire byte.

Logic Control Unit

l Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to implement the
board control function.
l Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.
l Processes clock signals.
l Provides board status information.
l Checks the status of the main and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
l Checks the status of the main and standby clocks.
l Supports the switching of system clock reference sources automatically and by running
specific commands.
l Supports the detection and reporting of the key clock status of each board in the system.

Board Status Detection Unit

l Detects board performance data such as board voltage.
l Stores board manufacturing information.

Clock Unit
Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.

3.18.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-121 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 288

Figure 3-121 Front panel of the AUX

AUX
STAT
SRV
F1/S1 PHONE ALMO ALMI

Indicators

Table 3-216 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.

SRV On (green) The system is working properly.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.

Auxiliary Ports and Management Ports

Table 3-217 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports

Port Description Connector Type

F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data port RJ45

ALMI Alarm input port

ALMO Alarm output port

PHONE Orderwire phone port

The auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the
ports, however, are different. Figure 3-122 shows the front view of an RJ45 connector.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 289

Figure 3-122 Front view of an RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-218 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.

Table 3-218 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port

Port Pin Signal

F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals

2 Grounding end

3 Receiving asynchronous data signals

4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)

5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)

6 Grounding end

7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)

8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

For the pin assignments for the ALMI and ALMO ports, see Table 3-219 and see Table
3-220.

Table 3-219 Pin assignments for the ALMI port

Port Pin Signal

ALMI 1 The first external alarm input signal

2 Grounding end for the first external alarm input signal

3 The second external alarm input signal

4 The third external alarm input signal

5 Grounding end for the third external alarm input signal

6 Grounding end for the second external alarm input

signal

7 The forth external alarm input signal

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 290

Port Pin Signal

8 Grounding end for the forth external alarm input signal

Table 3-220 Pin assignments for the ALMO port

Port Pin Signal

ALMO 1 The first external alarm output signal (+)

2 The first external alarm output signal (-)

3 The second external alarm output signal (+)

4 Connected in parallel with pin 1

5 Connected in parallel with pin 2

6 The second external alarm output signal (-)

7 Connected in parallel with pin 3

8 Connected in parallel with pin 6

External alarms are also called housekeeping alarms or relay alarms. OptiX RTN 980 provides
4input and 2output external alarms.
Figure 3-123 shows an interface circuit for external alarm input. When the relay of the external
system is switched off, the IDU interface circuit detects a high-level signal. When the relay of
the external system is switched on, the IDU interface circuit detects a low-level signal. The board
generates corresponding alarms based on the level signals detected by the IDU interface circuit.
External alarm input mainly achieves access of the relay alarms generated by the environmental
alarm generator.

Figure 3-123 Interface circuit for external alarm input

IDU External system

Circuit for external alarm input

+3.3 V/+5 V

Pull-up
Input level resistance Relay

Alarm
input

Figure 3-124 shows an interface circuit for external alarm output. When the external alarm
output conditions are met, the equipment switches on or off the relay depending on the conditions

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 291

that result in the alarm. External alarm output helps to provide equipment alarms to the
centralized alarming device.

Figure 3-124 Interface circuit for external alarm output

IDU

Circuit for external alarm output

Relay +

Output control Alarm

output

3.18.5 Valid Slots

The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.

Figure 3-125 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (AUX) Slot 14 (AUX)

Slot 11 (AUX) Slot 12 (AUX)

Slot 9 (AUX) Slot 10 (AUX)

Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 (AUX) Slot 8 (AUX)

Slot 15

Slot 5 (AUX) Slot 6 (AUX)

Slot 3 (AUX) Slot 4 (AUX)

Slot 1 (AUX) Slot 2 (AUX)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 292

Figure 3-126 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 (AUX) Slot 14 (AUX)

Slot 11 (AUX) Slot 12 (AUX)

Slot 9 (AUX) Slot 10 (AUX)

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 (AUX) Slot 8 (AUX)

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 (AUX) Slot 6 (AUX)

Slot 3 (AUX) Slot 4 (AUX)

Slot 1 (AUX) Slot 2 (AUX)

Table 3-221 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5 >
Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 8 and
10 > Slots 7 and 9

3.18.6 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-222 Orderwire interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-
defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Orderwire type Addressing call

Wire pair in each One symmetrical wire pair

transmission direction

Impedance (ohm) 600

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 293

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN
equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the
orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-223 Synchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined
byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 64

Interface type Codirectional

Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-224 Asynchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the
Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 19.2

Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-225 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D) 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight 0.27 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 1.3 W

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 294

3.19 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 980 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.

3.19.1 Version Description

The functional version of the PIU is SLB1.

3.19.2 Functions and Features

The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, power
detection, filtering, and information reporting.

Table 3-226 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports.

Table 3-226 Functions and features

Function and Feature Description

Basic functions Power access Two PIUs are provided and each accesses one -48 V
DC or -60 V DC power input.

Power output The PIU provides other boards with+3.3 V power or

-48 V power.

Protection Protection Supports 1+1 HSB protection.

Power l Protection against overcurrent

protection l Protection against short circuits

Surge Supported
protection

Power detection Supported

Board power consumption Supported

information query

Surge protection status monitoring Supported

EMI filtering Supported

3.19.3 Working Principle

The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, power detection unit, DC/DC unit, EMI
filtering unit, and communication control unit.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 295

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-127 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.

Figure 3-127 Functional block diagram of the PIU

Backplane

-48 V/-60 V -48 V Board operating in distributed

Protection and EMI filtering power supply mode
detection unit unit -48 V
Power Fan
detection unit

Detection signal +5.0 V

+3.3 V +3.3 V
DC/DC unit Other boards
Communication
Detection signal control unit Detection signal System control and
communication unit

Protection and Detection Unit

The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the
following functions:

l Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.

l Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm.
l Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.
l Detects whether -48 V power is available.
l Performs soft-start and mis-connection prevention functions.

Power Detection Unit

The power detection unit detects the voltage, current, and power consumption, and reports the
information to the system control unit through the communication control unit.

EMI Filtering Unit

The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filteringand low-frequency
interference filtering.

DC/DC Unit
The DC/DC unit converts the input -48 V power into the voltages that each part of the system
requires. The DC/DC unit performs the following functions:

l Converts -48 V power into +3.3 V power and supplies +3.3 V power to the communication
control unit of the PIU.
l Converts -48 V power into +3.3 V power and supplies +3.3 V power to other boards.
l Converts -48 V power into +5.0 V power and supplies +5.0 V power to the power detection
unit of the PIU.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 296

Communication Control Unit

The communication control unit achieves communication between the system control and
communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control
and communication unit:

l PIU manufacturing information

l PCB version information
l Power detection information
l Surge-protection failure information
l PIU temperature

3.19.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-128 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.

Figure 3-128 Front panel of the PIU

NEG(-) RTN(+)
PIU

ALM
PWR

-48V/-60V

Indicators

Table 3-227 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU

Indicator Status Description

PWR On (green) The power supply is normal.

Off There is no power supply.

ALM On (orange) The board is in the initialization state.

On (red) An alarm is reported on the PIU.

Off No alarm occurs.

Ports
The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-228 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their
respective usage.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 297

Table 3-228 Description of the ports on the PIU

Port Port Connector Type Corresponding Cable

Description

NEG -48 V power M6 screws, which can be 5.1 Power Cable

(-) input port installed with OT terminals

RTN BGND power

(+) input port

Labels
Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power
operations.

NOTICE
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power
supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.

3.19.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in slots 26 and 27.

Figure 3-129 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 Slot 14

Slot 11 Slot 12

Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 28 Slot 20

Slot 7 Slot 8

Slot 15

Slot 5 Slot 6

Slot 3 Slot 4

Slot 1 Slot 2

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 298

Figure 3-130 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 13 Slot 14

Slot 11 Slot 12

Slot 9 Slot 10

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

Slot 7 Slot 8

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 Slot 6

Slot 3 Slot 4

Slot 1 Slot 2

3.19.6 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.

Table 3-229 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.

Table 3-229 Technical specifications for the PIU

Item Performance

Dimensions 27.2 mm x 193.4 mm x 196.5 mm

Weight 1.00 kg

Power consumption < 25.0 W

Input voltage -38.4 V to -72.0 V

Fuse capacity 40.0 A

3.20 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

3.20.1 Version Description

The functional version of the FAN is SLBE1.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 299

3.20.2 Functions and Features

The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.

Table 3-230 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports.

Table 3-230 Functions and features

Function and Feature Description

Power input Accesses the -48 V power from the PIU through the power
bus in the backplane.

Number of fans 9

Intelligent fan speed Supports pulse-width modulation (PWM) speed adjustment.

adjustment

Protection Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans, protects
fans against overcurrent, and filters out high-frequency
signals.

O&M l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed,

alarms, version number, and board in-position status.
l Provides alarm indicators.
l Supports board power consumption information query

NOTE

l When one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace it within 96 hours if the ambient temperature
reaches 40C; it is recommended that you replace it within 24 hours if the ambient temperature exceeds
40C.
l When more than one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace the failed fans immediately.

3.20.3 Working Principle

The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.

Figure 3-131 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 300

Figure 3-131 Functional block diagram of the FAN

Backplane

-48 V
-48 V
Fan unit Power unit
-48 V

Communication
detection signal

Communication
Communication detection signal System control and
monitoring unit communication unit

Power Unit

l Receives -48 V power from the backplane.

l Provides the fan unit with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, supply combining,
and overcurrent protection.

Fan Unit
Nine air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.

Communication Monitoring Unit

Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, environmental temperature,
and rotating status of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and
communication unit.

Speed Adjustment Mechanism

The system control and communication unit detects the fan rotating speed and delivers the pulse-
width modulation signal to adjust the fan rotating speed. The system adjusts the fan rotating
speed based on the working temperature, as listed in Table 3-231.

Table 3-231 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed

Working Temperature Rotating Speed

25C 3600 rounds/minute

25C to 60C Linear increase in accordance with the

temperature

60C 12000 rounds/minute

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 301

3.20.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-132 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.

Figure 3-132 Front panel of the FAN

OptiX RTN 980

28 26 PIU 27 PIU
13 EXT 14 EXT
11 EXT 12 EXT
9 EXT 10 EXT
F 20
NCS
A
7 EXT 8 EXT
N 15
NCS
5 EXT 6 EXT
3 EXT 4 EXT
1 EXT 2 EXT

FAN

CAUTION

Hazardous
moving parts,keep
fingers and other
body parts away.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 302

Indicators

Table 3-232 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN

Indicator State Meaning

FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.

On (red) The fan is faulty.

Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

ESD Wrist Strap Jack

An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper
grounding of the human body.

Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:

l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.

l Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.

3.20.5 Valid Slots

The FAN can be inserted in slot 28 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
is the same as the physical slot.

Figure 3-133 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 Slot 27

Slot 13 Slot 14

Slot 11 Slot 12

Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8

Slot 15

Slot 5 Slot 6

Slot 3 Slot 4

Slot 1 Slot 2

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 303

Figure 3-134 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS

Slot 26 Slot 27

Slot 13 Slot 14

Slot 11 Slot 12

Slot 9 Slot 10

Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 5 Slot 6

Slot 3 Slot 4

Slot 1 Slot 2

3.20.6 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board
power consumption.

Table 3-233 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.

Table 3-233 Technical specifications for the FAN

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D) 218.0 mm x 50.5 mm x 217.0 mm

Weight 1.66 kg

Power consumption l < 15.9 W (room temperature)

l < 103.5 W (high temperature)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 304

4 Accessories

About This Chapter

The accessories of the OptiX RTN 980 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit
(PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements.

4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.

4.2 PDU
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet or an ETSI cabinet.
The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet. The OptiX RTN
980 equipment uses the C3 DC PDU.

4.3 AC Power Box

The external power box ETP4890-A2 can be used for AC power supply if an IDU is installed
indoors.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 305

4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel

provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16

1-8

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 9-16

Ports

Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel

Port Description Connector Type

T1-T16 Transmit ports for the first to BNC

sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)

R1-R16 Receive ports for the first to

sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)

1-8 The first to eighth E1 ports DB37

(connected to an IDU)

9-16 The ninth to sixteenth E1

ports (connected to an IDU)

Grounding bolt Connecting a PGND cable -

NOTE

The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.

Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 provides
the pin assignments for the E1 port.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 306

Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pos. 1

Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pin Signal Pin Signal

20 The first E1 received differential 21 The first E1 transmitted

signal (+) differential signal (+)

2 The first E1 received differential 3 The first E1 transmitted

signal (-) differential signal (-)

22 The second E1 received 23 The second E1 transmitted

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

4 The second E1 received 5 The second E1 transmitted

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

24 The third E1 received differential 25 The third E1 transmitted

signal (+) differential signal (+)

6 The third E1 received differential 7 The third E1 transmitted

signal (-) differential signal (-)

26 The fourth E1 received 27 The fourth E1 transmitted

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

8 The fourth E1 received 9 The fourth E1 transmitted

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

36 The fifth E1 received differential 35 The fifth E1 transmitted

signal (+) differential signal (+)

17 The fifth E1 received differential 16 The fifth E1 transmitted

signal (-) differential signal (-)

34 The sixth E1 received differential 33 The sixth E1 transmitted

signal (+) differential signal (+)

15 The sixth E1 received differential 14 The sixth E1 transmitted

signal (-) differential signal (-)

32 The seventh E1 received 31 The seventh E1 transmitted

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 307

Pin Signal Pin Signal

13 The seventh E1 received 12 The seventh E1 transmitted

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

30 The eighth E1 received 29 The eighth E1 transmitted

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

11 The eighth E1 received 10 The eighth E1 transmitted

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)

Others Reserved - -

NOTE
Because OptiX RTN 980 is nodal microwave equipment that consumes high power, it is recommended
that the power distribution cabinet directly supply power to the equipment. If the power distribution cabinet
fails to supply 40 A power distribution terminals, the C3 DC PDU is also applicable.

4.2.1 Appearance
The C3 PDU is a simple-designed PDU.

Figure 4-3 shows the C3 PDU.

Figure 4-3 Appearance of the C3 PDU

NOTE
Normally, there is a cover in the input power terminal area.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 308

4.2.2 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of the C3 PDU.

Front panel diagram

Figure 4-4 Front panel of the DC PDU

1 2 3

RTN1(+) NEG1(-)

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

PGND RTN2(+) NEG2(-)

1. Output power terminal area 2. Power switch area

3. Input power terminal area -

Port

Table 4-3 Description of ports on the DC PDU

Positio Port Port Description Port Specifications

n Identifi
er

Output -48 V Output power supply -48 V Four output power supplies (when
power used with the OptiX RTN 980),
termina GND Output power supply GND Cord end terminal (12-10AWG),
l area terminals
maximum cable diameter 6 mm2

Input RTN1 The first input power (+) M8 OT terminal, maximum cable
power (+) diameter 16 mm2.
termina
l area RTN2 The second input power (+)
(+)

NEG1 The first input power (-)

(-)

NEG2 The second input power (-)

(-)

PGND PGND terminals

Power SW1 Output power switch 1 controls The fuse capacity is 40 A.

switch the first output power.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 309

Positio Port Port Description Port Specifications

n Identifi
er

SW2 Output power switch 2 controls

the second output power.

SW3 Output power switch 3 controls

the third output power.

SW4 Output power switch 4 controls

the fourth output power.

When the C3 PDU is used together with the OptiX RTN 980, each output power occupies four
output terminals, each power switch controls one output power, and each output power can only
provide one input power to the OptiX RTN 980. The mapping relationship between power
switches on the front panel and output power terminals that the switches control is showed in
Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 Mapping relationship between power switches and output power terminals

- - G G - - G G - - G G - - G G S S S S
48 48 N N 48 48 N N 48 48 N N 48 48 N N W W W W
V V D D V V D D V V D D V V D D 1 2 3 4

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

Power switch area

4.2.3 Functions and Working Principles

The C3 PDU realizes the simple power distribution function and distributes the input power to
the equipment in a cabinet.

Functions
l The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power.
l Each input power supply supports two outputs.
l The fuse capacity of the switch of each output power is 40 A.
l Each power switch controls one output power (when the PDU is used with OptiX RTN
980).
l The PDU is protected against short circuit and overload.
l The PDU can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or in an ETSI cabinet.
l The PDU supports the DC-I power distribution mode.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 310

Working principles
The PDU mainly consists of input terminals, output terminals, and air circuit breakers. The PDU
supports the simple power distribution function for the input power.

Figure 4-6 Functional block diagram of the DC PDU

OUTPUT
INPUT
SW1 -48V
-48V
NEG1(-) SW2
BGND
SW3 BGND
NEG2(-) -48V
SW4
-48V
RTN1(+) BGND
BGND BGND
RTN2(+) -48V
-48V
BGND
BGND
-48V
-48V
PGND BGND
BGND

BGND

4.3 AC Power Box

The external power box ETP4890-A2 can be used for AC power supply if an IDU is installed
indoors.

4.3.1 Functions and Features

The AC power box converts single-phase 220 V AC power to -48 V DC power required by the
OptiX RTN 980. It can work with a storage battery to provide the DC power supply backup.

Table 4-4 lists the functions and features that the AC power box supports.

Table 4-4 Functions and features

Function and Feature Description

Basic function Converts 220 V AC power input to -48 V DC power output.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 311

Function and Feature Description

Power system AC power Supports 85 V to 300 V AC input voltages

configuration distributio
n

Rectifier l Supports a maximum of two rectifier modules.

module NOTE
When a storage battery is configured, three rectifier modules
are required.
l Supports the 30 A rectifier module type.

DC power Provides -42 V DC to -58 V DC power outputs, with -53.5

distributio V DC by default.
n

Power Required.
monitorin l Regulates rectifier module voltages and currents.
g unit
(PMU) l Powers on or off the rectifier module.
l Manages batteries.
l Monitors battery status when being configured with a
temperature sensor.

Storage Provides a valve regulated lead-acid battery (48 V/150 Ah/

battery 12 V-cell batteries).

Installation and maintenance l Supports horizontal and vertical installation in a 19-inch

cabinet (default configuration).
l Allows users to perform operations and maintenance
using the front panel.
l Supports simple operations on the LCD.
l Provides the hot-swappable rectifier module and
monitoring module.

4.3.2 Working Principle

This section describes how the AC power box works with the storage battery to supply power
to equipment.

System Architecture
The AC power box consists of an AC input module, a rectifier module, a DC distribution module,
and a monitoring module. The storage battery provides the backup power supply.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 312

Figure 4-7 Function block diagram of the AC power box

AC power box

DC power 48 V DC
220 V AC AC input Rectifier
distribution OptiX RTN 900
power input module module
module

Monitoring
module

48 V DC
Storage
battery

Working Principle
When receiving a 220 V AC power input, the rectifier module converts the 220 V AC power
into -48 V DC power and provides two -48 V DC power outputs to the OptiX RTN 980 and one
-48 V DC power output to the storage battery.

When the 220 V AC power input is interrupted, the storage battery discharges to ensure the two
-48 V DC power outputs to the OptiX RTN 980. The monitoring module detects alarms about
AC power input interruption. When the storage battery voltage decreases to 45 V, the monitoring
module reports DC undervoltage alarms. When the storage battery voltage decreases to 43 V,
the power supplied by the storage battery is cut off to protect the storage battery. When the 220
V AC power supply is restored, the power system resumes normal operation.

4.3.3 Front Panel

An AC power box has power ports, communication ports, indicators, and switches on its front
panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-8 Front panel of an AC power box

AC input Monitoring module Rectifier module

DC power istribution

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 313

AC/DC Power Distribution Subrack

An AC/DC power distribution subrack has ports and switches for AC power inputs and DC
power distribution.

Table 4-5 Ports on an AC/DC power distribution subrack

Location Mark Description

AC power L1-L3 Live wire terminals

input
N Neutral wire terminal

DC LOAD1- Four load ports

distribution LOAD4 l LOAD1: 10 A
l LOAD2: 30 A
l LOAD3-LOAD4: 40 A
NOTE
Plus signs (+) in marks indicate positive wiring terminals. Minus
signs (-) in marks indicate negative wiring terminals.

BATT One 80 A battery port

Rectifier Module
A rectifier module has a power indicator, an alarm indicator, and a fault indicator.

Figure 4-9 Front panel of a rectifier module

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 314

Table 4-6 Indicators on a rectifier module

Mark Indicator Description

Name

Power Indicates the power input and running status of a rectifier

indicator module.

Alarm Indicates the alarm status of a rectifier module.

indicator

Fault Indicates whether a fault occurs on a rectifier module.

indicator

NOTE
For details, see ETP4890-A2 User Manual.

Monitoring Module
A monitoring module has indicators, a liquid crystal display (LCD), buttons, and communication
and monitoring ports on its front panel.

Figure 4-10 Front panel of a monitoring module

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 315

Table 4-7 Front panel of a monitoring module

N Name Description
o.

1 Running status indicator Indicates the running status of a monitoring module.

2 Alarm indicator Indicates the alarm status of a monitoring module.

3 LCD Displays system running information and menu options.

4 Button Operates menus displayed on the LCD.

5 Locking switch Locks or unlocks a monitoring module.

6 DB50 port (Reserved)

7 Battery temperature Connects to a battery temperature sensor.

sensor port

8 RS485/RS232 port (Reserved)

9 COM port (Reserved)

NOTE
For details, see ETP4890-A2 User Manual.

4.3.4 Technical Specifications

This section describes the technical specifications of the AC power box, including electrical
specifications and entire system specifications.

Table 4-8 lists the technical specifications of the AC power box.

Table 4-8 Technical specifications

Item Specifications

AC input Input mode Single-phase, dual-live-wire, and three-phase

Input l 85 V AC to 300 V AC, with 110 V AC or 220 V AC by

voltage default
l 346 V AC to 415 V AC, with 380 V AC by default

Input 45 Hz to 66 Hz, with 50 Hz or 60 Hz by default

frequency

Power 0.99 (100% load)

factor

DC output Output -42 V DC to -58 V DC, with -53.5 V DC by default

voltage

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 316

Item Specifications

Output See the output power of the rectifier module. The maximum
power output power of the system is the product of the rectifier module
count and the output power of a single rectifier module.

Regulated 1.0%
voltage
precision

Peak-to- 200 mV (0 MHz to 20 MHz)

peak noise
voltage

Rectifier module type l R4815G1 (30 A rectifier of normal efficiency) (optional)

Power monitoring module SMU01C

type

Dimensions (H x W x D) 86.1 mm x 442 mm x 255 mm

Weight < 15 kg (including modules)

4.3.5 Power Cable

An AC power box (ETP 4890) has three types of power cable: AC input power cables, load
power cables, and battery power cables.

AC Input Power Cable

An AC input power cable carries AC power from an AC power supply device to an AC power
box.

Figure 4-11 AC input power cable diagram

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 317

Table 4-9 AC input power cable specifications

Cable Terminal (AC Power Terminal (ETP 4890)

Supply Device)

Power cable, 300 V/500 V, Naked crimping terminal, Naked crimping terminal,
60227IEC10 (BVV), 3x6 OT, 6 mm2, M8, tin plating, OT, 6 mm2, M6, tin plating,
mm2, black (cores: blue, insulated ring terminal, insulated ring terminal,
brown, yellow/green), 46 A, 12-10 AWG, yellow 12-10 AWG, yellow
with a package exempted from
fumigating

Load Power Cable

Load power cables carry DC power from an ETP 4890 to an OptiX RTN 980.

Figure 4-12 Load power cable diagram

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 318

Table 4-10 Load power cable specifications

Cable Terminal (ETP 4890) Terminal (OptiX RTN

980)

Power cable, 750 V, H07Z-K Common terminal, Naked crimping terminal,

UL3386, 6 mm2, blue+black, conductor cross section 6 OT, 6 mm2, M6, tin plating,
58 A, low smoke zero halogen mm2, length 20 mm, 30 A, insulated ring terminal,
cable insertion depth 12 mm, black 12-10 AWG, yellow
NOTE
For an OptiX RTN 980, the cable
can extend for a maximum
distance of 10 m.

Battery Power Cable

A battery power cable connects an AC power box to a storage battery. The battery power cable
and load power cable of an OptiX RTN 980 is the same.

Figure 4-13 Battery power cable diagram

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 319

Table 4-11 Battery power cable specifications

Cable Terminal (ETP 4890) Terminal (Battery)

Power cable, 750 V, H07Z-K Common terminal, Naked crimping terminal,

UL3386, 6 mm2, blue+black, conductor cross section 6 OT, 6 mm2, M6, tin plating,
58 A, low smoke zero halogen mm2, length 20 mm, 30 A, insulated ring terminal,
cable insertion depth 12 mm, black 12-10 AWG, yellow
NOTE
For a storage battery, the cable
can extend for a maximum
distance of 10 m.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 320

5 Cables

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used on
the IDU 980.

5.1 Power Cable

A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.

5.2 PGND Cable

PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.

5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.

5.4 XPIC Cable

An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.

5.5 Fiber Jumper

A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 980. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.

5.6 STM-1 Cable

An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.

5.7 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.

5.8 Orderwire Cable

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 321

An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the
orderwire phone.

5.9 Network Cable

A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 322

5.1 Power Cable

A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.

NOTE
If an OptiX RTN 980 uses an AC power box, the load power cable delivered with the AC power box must
be used. See 4.3.5 Power Cable.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-1 Power cable

Table 5-1 Power cable specifications

Model Cable Terminal

6 mm2 Power cable, 450 V/750 Naked crimping terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M6, tin
power cable V, H07Z-K UL3386, 6 plating, 12-10 AWG, yellow
and terminal mm2, blue/black, low
smoke zero Halogen
cable

16 mm2 Power cable, 450 V/750 Naked crimping terminal, OT, 16 mm2, M6, tin
power cable V, H07Z-K UL3386, 16 plating, naked ring terminal
and terminal mm2, blue/black, low
smoke zero Halogen
cable

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 323

NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 980, power cables with a 6 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance
of 10 m, and power cables with a 16 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance of 25 m.

5.2 PGND Cable

PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.

5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable

An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external
equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment
share the same ground.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable

Main label

1 Cable tie H.S.tube

1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignments
None.

5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable

An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
external equipment share the same ground.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 324

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable

Main label

Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignments
None.

An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that is
connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected
to the IF board.

NOTE

l A 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch
IF cable to the IF board.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 325

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-4 IF jumper

H.S.tube 2 PCS 2
L = 3 cm

2000 mm

1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female

Pin Assignments
None.

5.4 XPIC Cable

An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.

An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC
cable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the other
end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the same
XPIC workgroup.

l If the XPIC function is disenabled on an ISX2 or IFX2 board, use a short XPIC cable to
connect the IN and OUT ports on the board. Otherwise, board performance will be affected.
l If the XPIC function is disenabled on an ISV3 board, do not use a short XPIC cable to
connect the IN and OUT ports on the board. Otherwise, the board performance will be
affected.

XPIC cables are available in the following types:

l XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two
XPIC boards in the horizontal direction, for example, XPIC boards in slots 3 and 4.
l XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect
two XPIC boards in the vertical direction, for example, IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 5. These
XPIC cables are also used to connect the X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC
board to loop back signals.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 326

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-5 XPIC cable

1
1

2
2

1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male 2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male

Pin Assignments
None.

5.5 Fiber Jumper

Types of Fiber Jumpers

Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers

Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable

LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber

2 mm multi-mode fiber

LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 327

Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable

2 mm multi-mode fiber

LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber

2 mm multi-mode fiber

NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 980, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.

Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.

Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 328

Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector

Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector

5.6 STM-1 Cable

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 329

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-9 STM-1 cable

1. Coaxial connector, SAA straight/male 2. Main label 3. Coaxial cable

Pin Assignments
None.

Cable Specifications
Item Description

Connector Coaxial connector, SAA connector (1.0/2.3), 75-ohm straight/male

Cable model Coaxial cable, 75-ohm, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded

Number of cores One

Core diameter Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal
insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34
mm)

Length 10 m

Fireproof class CM

5.7 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment

An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly
receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.

Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1
signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohm
coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 330

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the external equipment

Main label

1
W

X1 A

ViewA Pos.96
Cable connector, Anea,
96-pin,female

Pos.1

1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female

NOTE

l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.

l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of
2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial
connector.

Pin Assignments

Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable

Pin W Remark Pin W Remark

s s
Core Serial Core Serial
No. No.

1 Tip 1 R0 25 Tip 2 T0

2 Ring 26 Ring

3 Tip 3 R1 27 Tip 4 T1

4 Ring 28 Ring

5 Tip 5 R2 29 Tip 6 T2

6 Ring 30 Ring

7 Tip 7 R3 31 Tip 8 T3

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 331

Pin W Remark Pin W Remark

s s
Core Serial Core Serial
No. No.

8 Ring 32 Ring

9 Tip 9 R4 33 Tip 10 T4

10 Ring 34 Ring

11 Tip 11 R5 35 Tip 12 T5

12 Ring 36 Ring

13 Tip 13 R6 37 Tip 14 T6

14 Ring 38 Ring

15 Tip 15 R7 39 Tip 16 T7

16 Ring 40 Ring

18 Ring 17 R8 42 Ring 18 T8

17 Tip 41 Tip

20 Ring 19 R9 44 Ring 20 T9

19 Tip 43 Tip

22 Ring 21 R10 46 Ring 22 T10

21 Tip 45 Tip

24 Ring 23 R11 48 Ring 24 T11

23 Tip 47 Tip

50 Ring 25 R12 74 Ring 26 T12

49 Tip 73 Tip

52 Ring 27 R13 76 Ring 28 T13

51 Tip 75 Tip

54 Ring 29 R14 78 Ring 30 T14

53 Tip 75 Tip

56 Ring 31 R15 80 Ring 32 T15

55 Tip 79 Tip

Shell Braid Shell Braid

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 332

Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable

Pin W Rema Tape Pin W Rema Tape

rks Color rks Color
Color Relati Color Relati
of the onshi of the onshi
Core p Core p

1 White Twiste R0 Blue 25 White Twiste T0 Blue

d pair d pair
2 Blue 26 Orang
e

3 White Twiste R1 27 White Twiste T1

d pair d pair
4 Green 28 Brown

5 White Twiste R2 29 Red Twiste T2

d pair d pair
6 Gray 30 Blue

7 Red Twiste R3 31 Red Twiste T3

d pair d pair
8 Orang 32 Green
e

9 Red Twiste R4 33 Red Twiste T4

d pair d pair
10 Brown 34 Gray

11 Black Twiste R5 35 Black Twiste T5

d pair d pair
12 Blue 36 Orang
e

13 Black Twiste R6 37 Black Twiste T6

d pair d pair
14 Green 38 Brown

15 Black Twiste R7 39 Yello Twiste T7

d pair w d pair

16 Gray 40 Blue

17 White Twiste R8 Orang 41 White Twiste T8 Orang

d pair e d pair e
18 Blue 42 Orang
e

19 White Twiste R9 43 White Twiste T9

d pair d pair
20 Green 44 Brown

21 White Twiste R10 45 Red Twiste T10

d pair d pair
22 Gray 46 Blue

23 Red Twiste R11 47 Red Twiste T11

d pair d pair

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 333

Pin W Rema Tape Pin W Rema Tape

rks Color rks Color
Color Relati Color Relati
of the onshi of the onshi
Core p Core p

24 Orang 48 Green
e

49 Red Twiste R12 73 Red Twiste T12

d pair d pair
50 Brown 74 Gray

51 Black Twiste R13 75 Black Twiste T13

d pair d pair
52 Blue 76 Orang
e

53 Black Twiste R14 77 Black Twiste T14

d pair d pair
54 Green 78 Brown

55 Black Twiste R15 79 Yello Twiste T15

d pair w d pair

56 Gray 80 Blue

Shell Braid Shell Braid

5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.
One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.

Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 334

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-11 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel

X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 male
Label 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Pin Assignments

Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37
connector

Wire Connecto Connecto Remarks Connecto Connecto Remarks

r X1 r X2/X3 r X1 r X2/X3

W1 X1.2 X2.20 R0 X1.10 X2.36 R4

X1.1 X2.2 X1.9 X2.17

X1.26 X2.21 T0 X1.34 X2.35 T4

X1.25 X2.3 X1.33 X2.16

X1.4 X2.22 R1 X1.12 X2.34 R5

X1.3 X2.4 X1.11 X2.15

X1.28 X2.23 T1 X1.36 X2.33 T5

X1.27 X2.5 X1.35 X2.14

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 335

Wire Connecto Connecto Remarks Connecto Connecto Remarks

r X1 r X2/X3 r X1 r X2/X3

X1.6 X2.24 R2 X1.14 X2.32 R6

X1.5 X2.6 X1.13 X2.13

X1.30 X2.25 T2 X1.38 X2.31 T6

X1.29 X2.7 X1.37 X2.12

X1.8 X2.26 R3 X1.16 X2.30 R7

X1.7 X2.8 X1.15 X2.11

X1.32 X2.27 T3 X1.40 X2.29 T7

X1.31 X2.9 X1.39 X2.10

W2 X1.18 X3.20 R8 X1.50 X3.36 R12

X1.17 X3.2 X1.49 X3.17

X1.42 X3.21 T8 X1.74 X3.35 T12

X1.41 X3.3 X1.73 X3.16

X1.20 X3.22 R9 X1.52 X3.34 R13

X1.19 X3.4 X1.51 X3.15

X1.44 X3.23 T9 X1.76 X3.33 T13

X1.43 X3.5 X1.75 X3.14

X1.22 X3.24 R10 X1.54 X3.32 R14

X1.21 X3.6 X1.53 X3.13

X1.46 X3.25 T10 X1.78 X3.31 T14

X1.45 X3.7 X1.77 X3.12

X1.24 X3.26 R11 X1.56 X3.30 R15

X1.23 X3.8 X1.55 X3.11

X1.48 X3.27 T11 X1.80 X3.29 T15

X1.47 X3.9 X1.79 X3.10

Shell Braid Shell Braid

5.8 Orderwire Cable

An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 336

PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the
orderwire phone.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable

1 Main label

6 6

1 1
X1 X2

1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector

Pin Assignments

Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Function

X1.3 X2.3 Tip

X1.4 X2.4 Ring

5.9 Network Cable

A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.

Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs)
and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pin
assignments for MDIs are provided in Table 5-7. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. The
pin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 5-8.

Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A

(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A

(-)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 337

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B

(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C

(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C

(-)

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B

(-)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D

(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D

(-)

Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B

(+)

2 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B

(-)

3 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A

(+)

4 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D

(+)

5 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D

(-)

6 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A

(-)

7 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C

(+)

8 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C

(-)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 338

Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used
between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and
crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment.

The NMS/COM port, NE cascading port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN
980 support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and
crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical
service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-13 Network cable

1
Label 1 Main label Label 2

8 8

1 1

1. Network port connector, RJ45

Pin Assignments

Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 339

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.2 X2.6 Green

X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.2 Orange

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 340

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description 6 Function Differences Between Boards of the Same Type

6 Function Differences Between Boards of the

Same Type

About This Chapter

6.1 Differences Between General-Purpose IF Boards

The general-purpose IF boards used on OptiX RTN NEs provide different functions and features.

6.2 Differences Between Packet Ethernet Boards

Different packet Ethernet boards used on OptiX RTN 980s provide different functions and
features.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 341

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description 6 Function Differences Between Boards of the Same Type

6.1 Differences Between General-Purpose IF Boards

The general-purpose IF boards used on OptiX RTN NEs provide different functions and features.

The general-purpose IF boards used on OptiX RTN NEs include IFU2, IFX2, ISU2, ISV3, and
ISX2 boards. Table 6-1 lists differences between these boards.

NOTE

l IF1 boards are not listed here because they are SDH IF boards.
l In Table 6-1, "Y" indicates that the corresponding board supports the specified function, and "N"
indicates that the corresponding board does not support the specified function.

Table 6-1 Differences between general-purpose IF boards

Item Specifications

IFU IFX2 ISU ISX ISV3 ISV3

2 2 2 (IS2 (IS3
Mode) Mode)

Radio Integrat Native E1 + Y Y Y Y Y Y

type ed IP Ethernet
radio
Native STM-1 + N N Y Y Y Y
Ethernet

SDH STM-1 N N Y Y Y Y
radio
2STM-1 N N Y Y Y Y

Ethernet frame header compression N N Y Y Y Y

XPIC N Y N Y Y Y

K byte pass-through N N Y Y Y Y

PLA N N Y Y Y Y

Modulation Common Y Y Y Y Y Y
scheme modulation
schemes:
QPSK to
256QAM

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 342

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description 6 Function Differences Between Boards of the Same Type

Item Specifications

IFU IFX2 ISU ISX ISV3 ISV3

2 2 2 (IS2 (IS3
Mode) Mode)

New modulation N N N N N Y
schemes:
l QPSK Strong
l 16QAM
Strong
l 512QAM
l 512QAM
Light
l 1024QAM
l 1024QAM
Light

6.2 Differences Between Packet Ethernet Boards

Different packet Ethernet boards used on OptiX RTN 980s provide different functions and
features.

The packet Ethernet boards used on OptiX RTN 980s include EM6T, EM6TA, EM6F, EM6FA,
EG4, and EG4P boards.

Table 6-2 Differences between packet Ethernet boards

Item Specifications

EM6T EM6T EM6F EM6F EG4 EG4P

A A

Port Number 4 4 4 4 - -
specific of fixed
ations FE
electric
al ports

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 343

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description 6 Function Differences Between Boards of the Same Type

Item Specifications

EM6T EM6T EM6F EM6F EG4 EG4P

A A

Number 2 2 - - 2 2
of fixed NOTE NOTE
GE There are There are
electric two other two other
al ports fixed GE fixed GE
ports that ports that
share share
service service
channels channels
with two with two
SFP ports. SFP ports.
Only one Only one
type of port type of port
can take can take
effect at a effect at a
time. time.

Number - - 2 2 2 2
of GE
SFP
ports

Backplane bus 1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s l 2.5 l 2.5

bandwidth Gbit/s Gbit/s
(slots 1 (slots 1
6) 6)
l 1 Gbit/s l 1 Gbit/s
(slots 7 (slots 7
14) 14)

1588 V2 N Y N Y Y Y

1588 ACR N Y N Y Y Y

Power over N N N N N Y
Ethernet

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 344

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

A Quick Reference

A.1 Photos of Boards' Front Panels

A.2 Board Loopback Types

Different service interface boards support different loopback types.

A.3 Indicators of Boards

A.4 Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 345

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

A.1 Photos of Boards' Front Panels

A.1.1 Photos of System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards

This section provides photos of system control, switching, and timing boards.

Figure A-1 CSHN board

A.1.2 Photos of IF Boards

This section provides photos of IF boards.

Figure A-2 ISU2 board

Figure A-3 ISX2 board

Figure A-4 ISV3 board

Figure A-5 IF1 board

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 346

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Figure A-6 IFU2 board

Figure A-7 IFX2 board

A.1.3 Photos of Service Boards

This section provides photos of some service boards.

Figure A-8 SL1D board

Figure A-9 CQ1 board

Figure A-10 EM6T board

Figure A-11 EM6F board

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 347

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Figure A-12 EM6FA board

Figure A-13 EG4 board

Figure A-14 EG4P board

Figure A-15 EFP8 board

Figure A-16 ML1 board

Figure A-17 SP3S board

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 348

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Figure A-18 SP3D board

A.2 Board Loopback Types

Different service interface boards support different loopback types.

Table A-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support

Board Loopback Type Remarks

SL1D/SL1DA/SL4D l Inloops at optical ports The SL4D board described in

l Outloops at optical ports this section refers to the logical
SL4D board to which the
l Inloops on VC-4 paths physical CSHN board is mapped.
l Outloops on VC-4 paths

CQ1 l Inloops at STM-1 ports -

l Outloops at STM-1 ports
l Inloops on E1 paths
l Outloops on E1 paths

SP3S/SP3D/ML1/MD1 l Inloops at E1 tributary -

ports
l Outloops at E1 tributary
ports

EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/ l Inloops at the MAC layer of The EG2D is the logical Ethernet
EM6FA Ethernet ports board to which the physical
EG2D l Inloops at the PHY layer of CSHN board is mapped.
Ethernet ports

EFP8 l Inloops at the PHY layer of -

Ethernet ports excluding
ports 9 and 10 (bridging
ports)
l Inloops at the MAC layer of
Ethernet ports excluding
port 10 (bridging port)
l Inloops on VC-12 paths

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 349

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Board Loopback Type Remarks

EG4/EG4P l Inloops at the MAC layer of -

Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the PHY layer of
Ethernet ports

EMS6 l Inloops at the PHY layer of -

Ethernet ports excluding
ports 7 and 8 (bridging
ports)
l Inloops at the MAC layer of
Ethernet ports excluding
port 8 (bridging port)
l Inloops on VC-3 paths

IF1 l Inloops at IF ports -

l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite
ports

IFU2/IFX2 l Inloops at IF ports -

l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite
ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of
IF_ETH ports

ISU2/ISX2 l Inloops at IF ports -

l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite
ports

ISV3 l Inloops at IF ports -

l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite
ports

A.3 Indicators of Boards

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 350

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicators of Boards

Table A-2 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.

PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board
100 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.

On (green) l When the board is being powered on

or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at The BOOTROM self-check fails during

100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

On (red) l The memory self-check fails or

SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.

On (red) The clock source is lost or a clock

switchover occurs.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 351

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

SRV On (green) The system is working properly.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

system.

ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the active one.
In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.

Off In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the standby one.
In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical port on the line is

reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical port on the line is free of

R_LOS alarms.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical port on the line is

reporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical port on the line is free

of R_LOS alarms.

LINK1 On (green) The connection at the GE1 port is

working properly.

Off The connection at the GE1 port is

interrupted.

ACT1 On or blinking (yellow) Data is being transmitted or received at

the GE1 port.

Off No data is being transmitted or received

at the GE1 port.

LINK2 On (green) The connection at the GE2 port is

working properly.

Off The connection at the GE2 port is

interrupted.

ACT2 On or blinking (yellow) Data is being transmitted or received at

the GE2 port.

Off No data is being transmitted or received

at the GE2 port.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 352

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

CRIT On (red) A critical alarm occurs on the NE.

MAJ On (orange) A major alarm occurs on the NE.

MIN On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the NE.

Table A-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.

On (red) l The ODU is reporting

critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor

alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at The antennas are not aligned.

300 ms intervals

Off The ODU is offline.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is

reporting defects.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 353

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.

Off l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Table A-4 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

services.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working properly.

On (red) l The ODU is reporting critical or major

alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 354

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

Blinks on (yellow) The antennas are not aligned.

and off at 300 ms
intervals

Off The ODU is offline.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is reporting defects.

Off The remote equipment is free of defects.

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the active one.
l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.

Off l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the standby one.
l In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.

Table A-5 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 355

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

On (red) l The ODU is reporting

critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor

alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at The antennas are not aligned.

300 ms intervals

Off The ODU is offline.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is

reporting defects.

Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.

Off l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Table A-6 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2

Indicator State Meaning

XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is

normal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function is

disabled.

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 356

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.

On (red) l The ODU is reporting

critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor

alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at The antennas are not aligned.

300 ms intervals

Off The ODU is offline.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is

reporting defects.

Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.

Off l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 357

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Table A-7 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2

Indicator State Meaning

XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is

normal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function is

disabled.

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.

On (red) l The ODU is reporting

critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor

alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at The antennas are not aligned.

300 ms intervals

Off The ODU is offline.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is

reporting defects.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 358

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.

Off l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.

Table A-8 Status explanation for indicators on an ISV3 board

Indicator State Meaning

XPIC On (green) XPIC input signals are

normal.

On (red) XPIC input signals are lost.

Off XPIC is disabled.

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, not

created, or not powered on.

SRV On (green) Services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm has

been reported.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm has

been reported.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 359

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

On (red) The ODU has reported a

critical or major alarm, or
was not powered on.

On (yellow) The ODU has reported a

minor alarm.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at Antennas are not well

300 ms intervals aligned.

Off The ODU is offline.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment has

reported a defect.

Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.

ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the

board is working as the main
board.
In an unprotected system, the
board has been activated.

Off In a 1+1 protected system, the

board is working as the
standby board.
In an unprotected system, the
board has not been activated.

Table A-9 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The system is working properly.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 360

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board during
100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green) l When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
ms intervals power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loading

LINK1a On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and is

not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (green) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Off The GE1 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.

LINK2a On (green) The GE2 port is connected correctly and is

not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (green) The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Off The GE2 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 361

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Table A-10 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The system is working properly.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.

PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board during
100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green) l When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
ms intervals power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red) The memory self-check fails or loading

L/A1a On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and is

not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Off The GE1 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 362

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

L/A2a On (green) The GE2 port is connected correctly and is

not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (yellow) The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Off The GE2 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.
NOTE
a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.

Table A-11 Status explanation for indicators on an EG4/EG4P board

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, not created, or not

powered on.

SRV On (green) Services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm has been reported.

On (yellow) A minor alarm has been reported.

Off No service is configured.

L/A1 On (green) Port GE1 is connected correctly but is not

(optical/ receiving or transmitting data.
electrical
port 1) Blinks on (red) and off at 300 Port GE1 has received extremely high
ms intervals optical power (applicable only to an optical
port).

Blinks on (red) for 300 ms and Port GE1 has received extremely low optical
off for 700 ms at 1000 ms power (applicable only to an optical port).
intervals

Blinks (yellow) Port GE1 is receiving or transmitting data.

Off Port GE1 is not connected or is incorrectly

connected.

L/A2 On (green) Port GE2 is connected correctly but is not

(optical/ receiving or transmitting data.
electrical
port 2)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 363

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

Blinks on (red) and off at 300 Port GE2 has received extremely high
ms intervals optical power (applicable only to an optical
port).

Blinks on (red) for 300 ms and Port GE2 has received extremely low optical
off for 700 ms at 1000 ms power (applicable only to an optical port).
intervals

Blinks (yellow) Port GE2 is receiving or transmitting data.

Off Port GE2 is not connected or is incorrectly

connected.

L/A3 On (green) Port GE3 is connected correctly but is not

(electrical receiving or transmitting data.
port 3)
Blinks (yellow) Port GE3 is receiving or transmitting data.

Off Port GE3 is not connected or is incorrectly

connected.

L/A4 On (green) Port GE4 is connected correctly but is not

(electrical receiving or transmitting data.
port 4)
Blinks (yellow) Port GE4 is receiving or transmitting data.

Off Port GE4 is not connected or is incorrectly

connected.

P1 On (green) Power over Ethernet port 1 is enabled.

Off Power over Ethernet port 1 is disabled or is

working abnormally.

P2 On (green) Power over Ethernet port 2 is enabled.

Off Power over Ethernet port 2 is disabled or is

working abnormally.
NOTE
Indicators P1 and P2 are available only on the front panels of EG4P boards, indicating the power supply
status of power-over-Ethernet ports.

Table A-12 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 364

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board during
100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green) l The upper layer software is being

initialized during the power-on or
resetting process of the board.
l The software is running properly during
the running process of the board.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
ms intervals power-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loading

SRV On (green) The system is working normally.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.

LINK1 On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly.

Blinks on (red) and off at 300 The receive optical power at the GE1 optical
ms intervals port is higher than the upper threshold.

Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700 The receive optical power at the GE1 optical
ms off port is lower than the lower threshold.

Off The GE1 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.

ACT1 Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 365

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

Off The GE1 port is not receiving or

transmitting data.

LINK2 On (green) The GE2 port is connected correctly.

Blinks on (red) and off at 300 The receive optical power at the GE2 optical
ms intervals port is higher than the upper threshold.

Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700 The receive optical power at the GE2 optical
ms off port is lower than the lower threshold.

Off The GE1 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.

ACT2 Blinking (yellow) The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Off The GE2 port is not receiving or

transmitting data.

Table A-13 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.

PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board during
100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.

On (green) l When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
ms intervals power-on or resetting process of the board.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 366

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loading

SRV On (green) The system is working properly.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.

Table A-14 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

Off The services are not

configured.

LOS1 On (red) The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.

Off The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is free of R_LOS
alarms.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 367

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

LOS2 On (red) The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is reporting
the R_LOS alarm.

Off The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is free of
R_LOS alarms.

Table A-15 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

Off The services are not

configured.

Table A-16 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 368

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.

Off The services are not

configured.

Table A-17 Status explanation for indicators on a CQ1 board

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off The board is not working, not

created, or not powered on.

SRV On (green) Services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm has

been reported.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm has

been reported.

Off No service is configured.

LOS1 On (red) The first port has reported an

R_LOS alarm.

Off The first port does not report

any R_LOS alarms.

LOS2 On (red) The second port has reported

an R_LOS alarm.

Off The second port does not

report any R_LOS alarms.

LOS3 On (red) The third port has reported an

R_LOS alarm.

Off The third port does not report

any R_LOS alarms.

LOS4 On (red) The fourth port has reported

an R_LOS alarms.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 369

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

Off The fourth port does not

report any R_LOS alarms.

Table A-18 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.

SRV On (green) The system is working properly.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.

Table A-19 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU

Indicator Status Description

PWR On (green) The power supply is normal.

Off There is no power supply.

ALM On (orange) The board is in the initialization state.

On (red) An alarm is reported on the PIU.

Off No alarm occurs.

Table A-20 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN

Indicator State Meaning

FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.

On (red) The fan is faulty.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 370

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Indicator State Meaning

Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

A.4 Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board

Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board

Table A-21 Weight and power consumption of each board

Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)

CSHN 1.60 kg < 36.6 W

IF1 0.72 kg < 12.0 W

IFU2 0.79 kg < 23.0 W

IFX2 0.80 kg < 33.0 W

ISU2 0.60 kg < 22.0 W

ISX2 0.60 kg < 23.0 W

ISV3 0.65 kg < 23.0 W

EM6T 0.37 kg < 10.4 W

EM6TA 0.40 kg < 16.2 W

EM6F 0.40 kg < 11.3 W

EM6FA 0.40 kg < 15.4 W

EG4 0.30 kg <6W

EG4P 0.45 kg l < 20 W (with maximum P&E loads)

l < 14.7 W (with 50% P&E loads)
l < 9.3 W (no P&E loads)

EMS6 0.50 kg < 16.5 W

EFP8 0.60 kg < 13.5 W

SL1D 0.30 kg < 3.4 W

SL1DA 0.30 kg < 3.3 W

ML1 0.45 kg < 7.0 W

MD1 0.50 kg < 12.2 W

CQ1 0.47 kg < 11.5 W

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 371

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description A Quick Reference

Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)

SP3S 0.50 kg (VER.B) < 5.7 W (VER.B)

0.40 kg (VER.C) < 4.8 W (VER.C)

SP3D 0.64 kg (VER.B) < 9.6 W (VER.B)

0.54 kg (VER.C) < 8.3 W (VER.C)

AUX 0.27 kg < 1.3 W

PIU 1.00 kg < 25.0 W

FAN 1.70 kg < 15.9 W (room temperature)

< 103.5 W (high temperature)

Empty chassis 7.10 kg -

(with only the
backplane)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 372

B Glossary

Numerics
3G See 3rd Generation.
3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
3rd Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver
data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to
19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
802.1Q in 802.1Q A VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame. The
(QinQ) implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN
tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service
provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2
VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over private
VLANs.

A
A/D analog/digit
ABR See available bit rate.
ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization.
ACL See access control list.
ADC analog to digital converter
ADM add/drop multiplexer
AF See assured forwarding.
AIS alarm indication signal
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.
AM See adaptive modulation.
APS automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 373

ASBR See autonomous system boundary router.

ASIC See application-specific integrated circuit.
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
ATPC See automatic transmit power control.
AU See administrative unit.
Address Resolution An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. The ARP protocol
Protocol (ARP) enables hosts and routers to determine link layer addresses through ARP requests and
responses. The address resolution is a process by which the host converts the target IP
address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of
ARP is to use the target equipment's IP address to query its MAC address.
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a
(ACL) resource.
adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the
(AM) channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment uses a high-
efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment uses the
low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link
that carries high-priority services.
adjacent channel A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal
alternate polarization polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
(ACAP)
administrative unit The information structure that enables adaptation between the higher order path layer
(AU) and the multiplex section layer. The administrative unit consists of an information
payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer, which indicates the offset of the
payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.
alarm suppression A method to suppress alarms for the alarm management purpose. Alarms that are
suppressed are no longer reported from NEs.
analog signal A signal in which information is represented with a continuously variable physical
quantity, such as voltage. Because of this constant changing of the wave shape with
regard to its passing a given point in time or space, an analog signal might have a virtually
indefinite number of states or values. This contrasts with a digital signal that is expressed
as a square wave and therefore has a very limited number of discrete states. Analog
signals, with complicated structures and narrow bandwidth, are vulnerable to external
interference.
application-specific A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in
integrated circuit the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.
(ASIC) By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for
many needs.
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
(AF) It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 374

attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
automatic laser A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters
shutdown (ALS) and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic transmit A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
power control (ATPC) at the receiver
autonomous system A router that exchanges routing information with other ASs.
boundary router
(ASBR)
available bit rate (ABR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.

B
B-ISDN See broadband integrated services digital network.
BDI See backward defect indication.
BE See best effort.
BER bit error rate
BFD See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIOS See basic input/output system.
BIP See bit interleaved parity.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.
BSC See base station controller.
BTS base transceiver station
Bidirectional A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
Forwarding Detection detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established between
(BFD) neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to each other. If
one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated period, the system regards
that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper layer protocol to take actions to
recover the faulty link.
backbone network A network that forms the central interconnection for a connected network. The
communication backbone for a country is WAN. The backbone network is an important
architectural element for building enterprise networks. It provides a path for the exchange
of information between different LANs or subnetworks. A backbone can tie together
diverse networks in the same building, in different buildings in a campus environment,
or over wide areas. Generally, the backbone network's capacity is greater than the
networks connected to it.
backward defect A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the
indication (BDI) upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 375

bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies a transmission line or channel can carry in a network.
In fact, the bandwidth is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies in
the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer
rate.
base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM/CDMA network. It
(BSC) interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface.
It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station
management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC
controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.
basic input/output Firmware stored on the computer motherboard that contains basic input/output control
system (BIOS) programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
baud rate The number of times per second the signal can change on a transmission line. Commonly,
the transmission line uses only two signal states, making the baud rate equal to the
number of bits per second that can be transferred. The underlying transmission technique
may use some of the bandwidth, so it may not be the case that user data transfers at the
line's specified bit rate.
best effort (BE) A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity, the transmitting equipment generates
(BIP) an X-bit code over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of
the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered
portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit
sequences within the specified portion, and so forth. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that an even number of 1s exist in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits in the same bit position within the X-bit
sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.
bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges
operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because bridges store
and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges
differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP
addresses.
bridge protocol data Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning
unit (BPDU) tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses,
priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended destination. BPDU
messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. These
loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge interfaces and placing
redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadband integrated A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as voice.
services digital network It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based circuits at
(B-ISDN) 155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 376

broadcast domain A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any device
within the group. The broadcast domain also refers to the set of ports between which a
device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or unknown destination frame.

C
CAR committed access rate
CBR See constant bit rate.
CBS See committed burst size.
CC See continuity check.
CCDP See co-channel dual polarization.
CDMA See Code Division Multiple Access.
CE See customer edge.
CES See circuit emulation service.
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CM connection management
CORBA See Common Object Request Broker Architecture.
CPU See central processing unit.
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CTC common transmit clock
CW control word
Code Division Multiple A communication scheme that uses frequency expansion technology to form different
Access (CDMA) code sequences. When the CDMA scheme is used, subscribers with different addresses
can use different code sequences for multi-address connection.
Common Object A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of
Request Broker programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two
Architecture (CORBA) programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different
platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or
ORB, and therefore does not need to know the structure of the program from which the
object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments.
Common and Internal The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity
Spanning Tree (CIST) using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the
bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
cable tie A tie used to bind cables.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 377

carrier sense multiple Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
access with collision networking access method in which:
detection (CSMA/CD)
l A carrier sensing scheme is used.
l A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame,
stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random
time interval before trying to send that frame again.
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
(CPU) and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or speed between two or more
locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave),
fiber, or any combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second
in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For
example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s
(1012 bit/s).
circuit emulation A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
service (CES) transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
clock tracing The method of keeping the time on each node synchronized with a clock source in the
network.
co-channel dual A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
polarization (CCDP) polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization has twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
committed burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst
(CBS) IP packet size when information is transferred at the committed information rate. This
parameter must be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of an
IP packet to be forwarded.
constant bit rate (CBR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check (CC) An Ethernet connectivity fault management (CFM) method used to detect the
connectivity between MEPs by having each MEP periodically transmit a Continuity
Check Message (CCM).
cross polarization A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate
interference the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
cancellation (XPIC)
customer edge (CE) A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly connecting
to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 378

cyclic redundancy A procedure used to check for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a
check (CRC) complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before performing the transmission and includes the
generated number in the packet it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device
then repeats the same calculation. If both devices obtain the same result, the transmission
is considered to be error free. This procedure is known as a redundancy check because
each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D
DC direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
(with ground) (DC-C) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
ground) (DC-I) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel.
DCN See data communication network.
DDF digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network.
DE discard eligible
DM See delay measurement.
DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a
domain that is not DS-capable.
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP See differentiated services code point.
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DiffServ See Differentiated Services.
Differentiated Services An IETF standard that defines a mechanism for controlling and forwarding traffic in a
(DiffServ) differentiated manner based on CoS settings to handle network congestion.
Distance Vector An Internet gateway protocol based primarily on the RIP. The DVMRP protocol
Multicast Routing implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution and uses IGMP to exchange
Protocol (DVMRP) routing datagrams with its neighbors.
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data
network (DCN) communication function.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 379

data communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
channel (DCC) transmit information on the operation, management, maintenance, and provisioning
(OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channel composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as
the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel composed of bytes D4-D12 is
referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
delay measurement The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source
(DM) node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source node,
when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.
differentiated services According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service (Diff-Serv),
code point (DSCP) the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most significant bits and
two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for priority marking.
Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most important bits in the ToS. It is
the combination of IP precedence and types of service. The DSCP value is used to ensure
that routers supporting only IP precedence can be used because the DSCP value is
compatible with IP precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB). Therefore,
terminal devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value.
digital data network A data transmission network that is designed to transmit data on digital channels (such
(DDN) as the fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel).
digital modulation A method that controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier
based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can
be transmitted by the carrier.
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to simultaneously radiate or receive two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.

E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation.
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.
ECC See embedded control channel.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility.
EMI See electromagnetic interference.
EPL See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
EPLD See erasable programmable logical device.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ESD electrostatic discharge
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 380

Ethernet A LAN technology that uses the carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) media access control method. The Ethernet network is highly reliable and
easy to maintain. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000
Mbit/s, or 10,000 Mbit/s.
Ethernet aggregation A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
(E-Aggr) connection).
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet local area A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
network (E-LAN) virtual connection).
Ethernet private LAN A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
service (EPLAN) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
(EPL) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private LAN service networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-to-
(EVPLAN) multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private line (EVPL) networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
electromagnetic A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its
compatibility (EMC) individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without
causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic
interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
interference (EMI) limits the performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
embedded control A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer
channel (ECC) to enable the transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
erasable A logical array device which can be used to implement the required functions by
programmable logical programming the array. In addition, a user can modify and program the array repeatedly
device (EPLD) until the program meets the requirement.

F
FD See frequency diversity.
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 381

FDI See forward defect indication.

FEC See forward error correction.
FFD fast failure detection
FFD packet A path failure detection method independent from CV. Different from a CV packet, the
frequency for generating FFD packets is configurable to satisfy different service
requirements. By default, the frequency is 20/s. An FFD packet contains information the
same as that in a CV packet. The destination end LSR processes FFD packets in the same
way for processing CV packets.
FIFO See first in first out.
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FTP File Transfer Protocol
fiber distributed data A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
interface (FDDI) speed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100
megabits per second on token ring networks.
field programmable A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (FPGA) (ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies many
of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate arrays.
first in first out (FIFO) A stack management method in which data that is stored first in a queue is also read and
invoked first.
forward defect A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first
indication (FDI) detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its
primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs
and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the
correction (FEC) transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission can be corrected at the receive end.
fragmentation A process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network node
that does not support the original size of the packet.
frequency diversity A diversity scheme in which two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
(FD) frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.

G
GCRA generic cell rate algorithm
GFC generic flow control
GFP See Generic Framing Procedure.
GNE See gateway network element.
GPS See Global Positioning System.
GTS See generic traffic shaping.
GUI graphical user interface

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 382

Generic Framing A framing and encapsulated method that can be applied to any data type. GFP is defined
Procedure (GFP) by ITU-T G.7041.
Global Positioning A global navigation satellite system that provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
System (GPS) timing services to users worldwide.
gateway A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to
translate the data in the two network segments.
gateway network An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network
element (GNE) management system.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that proactively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
(GTS) to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.

H
HDLC High-Level Data Link Control
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service.
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
HSM hitless switch mode
High Speed Downlink A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement
Packet Access for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
(HSDPA) maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
hierarchical quality of A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling according
service (HQoS) to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and the
administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth
can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports
the AM function.

I
I/O input/output
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.
IDU See indoor unit.
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IF See intermediate frequency.
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this
manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IGP See Interior Gateway Protocol.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 383

IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM.

IP Internet Protocol
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.
ISDN integrated services digital network
ISO International Organization for Standardization
IST internal spanning tree
ITU See International Telecommunication Union.
IWF Interworking Function
Institute of Electrical A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United
and Electronics States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
Engineers (IEEE) electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important
technology standards.
Interior Gateway A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in small-
Protocol (IGP) sized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the routing information
protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP), the enhanced IGRP
(EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF).
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
Intermediate System datagram or packets through a packet-based network.
(IS-IS)
International A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
Telecommunication bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
Union (ITU) radio networks (ITU-R).
Internet Control A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a
Message Protocol host server and an Internet gateway.
(ICMP)
Internet Group One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
Management Protocol groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain
(IGMP) multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
version 4 (IPv4) assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together
are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the
network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
version 6 (IPv6) (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet
Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while
an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 384

indoor unit (IDU) The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and intermediate frequency (IF) processing for services.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
(IF) signal.
inverse multiplexing A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a
over ATM (IMA) cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate
is approximately the sum of the link rates.

L
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
LAPS Link Access Protocol-SDH
LB See loopback.
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LM See loss measurement.
LOS See loss of signal.
LPT link-state pass through
LSDB link state database
LSP See label switched path.
LSP tunnel An LSP over which traffic is transmitted based on labels that are assigned to FECs on
the ingress. The traffic is transparent to the intermediate nodes
LSR See label switching router.
LTE Long Term Evolution
Layer 2 switching A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch
transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address
is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called Layer 2
switching.
Link Aggregation A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
Control Protocol reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their
(LACP) parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed,
LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the
aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
(LSP) switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
common routing mechanisms or through configuration.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 385

label switching router Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
(LSR) composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. Semi-conductor lasers provide the light
used in a fiber system.
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the
maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
linear MSP linear multiplex section protection
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
(LAG) aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
adjustment scheme control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
(LCAS) bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the network and element management systems.
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
(LAN) kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate. Current
LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run at 1,000
Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
loopback (LB) A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
loss measurement (LM) A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service frames
where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames between a
pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.

M
MA maintenance association
MAC See Media Access Control.
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
MBS maximum burst size
MD See maintenance domain.
MD5 See message digest algorithm 5.
MDI medium dependent interface
MEP maintenance association end point
MIB See management information base.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 386

MIP maintenance intermediate point

MLPPP Multi-Link Point-to-Point Protocol
MP maintenance point
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS L2VPN A network that provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In this
case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of different
media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS VPN See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MPLS-TP See MultiProtocol Label Switching Transport Profile.
MS multiplex section
MSP See multiplex section protection.
MST region See Multiple Spanning Tree region.
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF See mean time between failures.
MTTR See mean time to repair.
MTU See maximum transmission unit.
Media Access Control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
(MAC) data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
MultiProtocol Label A packet transport technology proposed by IETF that combines the packet experience
Switching Transport of MPLS with the operational experience of transport networks.
Profile (MPLS-TP)
Multiple Spanning A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
Tree Protocol (MSTP) redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case,
the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The
protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This
solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/
RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiple Spanning A region that consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among
Tree region (MST them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST
region) region attributes belong to the same MST region.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 387

Multiprotocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
Switching (MPLS) layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols.
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by connectivity
(MD) fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are managed by a single
Internet service provider (ISP).
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base (MIB) comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
unit (MTU) depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
mean time between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
failures (MTBF) of the reliability of the system.
mean time to repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
(MTTR)
message digest A hash function that is used in a variety of security applications to check message
algorithm 5 (MD5) integrity. MD5 processes a variable-length message into a fixed-length output of 128
bits. It breaks up an input message into 512-bit blocks (sixteen 32-bit little-endian
integers). After a series of processing, the output consists of four 32-bit words, which
are then cascaded into a 128-bit hash number.
multicast A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
multiple spanning tree A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a simply
instance (MSTI) and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that
is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to
multiple MSTIs.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
protection (MSP) including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
multiprotocol label An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol label
switching virtual switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network routers and
private network switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines traditional routing
(MPLS VPN) technology and label switching technology. It can be used to construct the broadband
Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.

N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 388

NE network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, a user can query, manage, and
maintain NEs, boards, and ports.
NNI network-to-network interface
NPE network provider edge
NSAP See network service access point.
NSF non-stop forwarding
network service access A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made available
point (NSAP) to a Network service user by the Network service provider.
network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast
packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality
and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by network
connection or configuration problems.
node A managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame, one node stands for
one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for one frame of the
device.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element.
non-gateway network A network element that communicates with the NM application layer through the
element (non-GNE) gateway NE application layer.

O
O&M operation and maintenance
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
ODF optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit.
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.
Open Shortest Path A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses
First (OSPF) cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology,
which is identical on all routers in the area.
operation, A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification, location,
administration and and repair.
maintenance (OAM)
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
outdoor unit (ODU) The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for radio frequency (RF) signals.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 389

P2P See point-to-point service.

PBS See peak burst size.
PCB See printed circuit board.
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDU protocol data unit
PE See provider edge.
PHB See per-hop behavior.
PIR peak information rate
PLA See physical link aggregation.
PLL See phase-locked loop.
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRI primary rate interface
PSN See packet switched network.
PSTN See public switched telephone network.
PTN packet transport network
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PTP clock See Precision Time Protocol clock.
PVP See permanent virtual path.
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
Precision Time A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588
Protocol clock (PTP V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control
clock) system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.
packet switched A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
network (PSN)
paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the
backplane.
peak burst size (PBS) A parameter that defines the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP
packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate.
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
(PHB) behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
permanent virtual path Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
(PVP)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 390

phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector that compares the frequency of a
(PLL) voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator. The output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,
is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the
incoming or reference frequency.
physical link Being a technology providing load balancing based on physical layer bandwidths,
aggregation (PLA) physical link aggregation (PLA) combines Ethernet transmission paths in several
Integrated IP radio links into a logical Ethernet link for higher Ethernet bandwidth and
Ethernet transmission reliability.
plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
hierarchy (PDH) rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.
point-to-point service A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
(P2P) terminal users.
polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or
rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is
perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically
polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the
plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the
tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
(PCB) using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging
routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and
forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be
a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent of
sequence (PRBS) the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence.
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a
edge-to-edge (PWE3) telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network
(PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division
multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
public switched A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public
telephone network subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.
(PSTN)

Q
QAM See quadrature amplitude modulation.
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 391

QinQ See 802.1Q in 802.1Q.

QoS See quality of service.
quadrature amplitude Both an analog and a digital modulation scheme. It conveys two analog message signals,
modulation (QAM) or two digital bit streams, by changing (modulating) the amplitudes of two carrier waves,
using the amplitude-shift keying (ASK) digital modulation scheme or amplitude
modulation (AM) analog modulation scheme. These two waves, usually sinusoids, are
out of phase with each other by 90 and are thus called quadrature carriers or quadrature
components hence the name of the scheme.
quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
keying (QPSK) the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-
bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
quality of service (QoS) A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.

R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
RADIUS accounting An accounting mode in which the BRAS sends the accounting packets to the RADIUS
server. Then the RADIUS server performs accounting.
RDI remote defect indication
RED See random early detection.
REI remote error indication
RF See radio frequency.
RFC See Request For Comments.
RMEP remote maintenance association end point
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller.
RSL See received signal level.
RSSI See received signal strength indicator.
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol.
RTN radio transmission node
RTSP Real-Time Streaming Protocol
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree
Protocol (RSTP) convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 392

Remote Authentication A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized
Dial In User Service access control mechanism. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its
(RADIUS) transmission protocol to ensure real-time quality. RADIUS also supports the
retransmission and multi-server mechanisms to ensure good reliability.
Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
(RFC) operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources
such as InterNIC.
Resource Reservation A protocol that reserves resources on every node along a path. RSVP is designed for an
Protocol (RSVP) integrated services Internet.
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
radio frequency (RF) A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
radio network A device in a radio network subsystem that is in charge of controlling the usage and
controller (RNC) integrity of radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
(RED) to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
real-time variable bit A parameter intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over IP
rate (rt-VBR) (VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell rate (PCR),
sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can expect the source
device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time.
received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
(RSL)
received signal strength The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
indicator (RSSI) receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
receiver sensitivity The minimum acceptable value of mean received power at point Rn (a reference point
at an input to a receiver optical connector) to achieve a 1x10-12 BER when the FEC is
enabled.
regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
route The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. Routes can change
dynamically.
router A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the
optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a
network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for
sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a
WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.
rt-VBR See real-time variable bit rate.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 393

S
SAI service area identifier
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SCSI Small Computer System Interface
SD See space diversity.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SEC security screening
SES severely errored second
SETS SDH equipment timing source
SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SLA See service level agreement.
SNCP subnetwork connection protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNR See signal-to-noise ratio.
SSL See Secure Sockets Layer.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
STM See synchronous transport module.
STM-1 See Synchronous Transport Module level 1.
STM-4 Synchronous Transport Module level 4
STM-N Synchronous Transport Module level N
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
Secure Sockets Layer A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer
(SSL) and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities.
Simple Network A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
Management Protocol the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
(SNMP) transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Synchronization Status A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message (SSM) SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network or
synchronization network.
Synchronous Synchronous transfer mode at 155 Mbit/s.
Transport Module level
1 (STM-1)

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 394

service level agreement A service agreement between a customer and a service provider. SLA specifies the
(SLA) service level for a customer. The customer can be a user organization (source domain)
or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). An SLA may include
traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole
or partially.
signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal-to-noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
(SNR) given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB.
single-ended switching A protection mechanism that takes switching action only at the affected end of the
protected entity in the case of a unidirectional failure.
single-polarized An antenna intended to radiate or receive radio waves with only one specified
antenna polarization.
space diversity (SD) A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance
to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two
signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the device and is matched
with the IP address.
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the
hierarchy (SDH) transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN.
synchronous transport An information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists
module (STM) of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a
block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably conditioned
for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the
network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher
capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities
for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.

T
T1 A North American standard for high-speed data transmission at 1.544Mbps. It provides
24 x 64 kbit/s channels.
TCI tag control information
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TD-SCDMA See Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access.
TDD time division duplex
TDM See time division multiplexing.
TDMA See Time Division Multiple Access.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 395

TE See traffic engineering.

TEDB See traffic engineering database.
TIM trace identifier mismatch
TMN See telecommunications management network.
TOS test operation system
TTL See time to live.
TUG tributary unit group
Telnet A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows users
to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local system.
Telnet is defined in RFC 854.
Time Division Multiple An approach used for allocating a single channel among many users, by dividing the
Access (TDMA) channel into different timeslots during which each user has access to the medium.
Time Division- A 3G mobile communications standard found in UMTS mobile telecommunications
Synchronous Code networks in China as an alternative to W-CDMA. TD-SCDMA integrates technologies
Division Multiple of CDMA, TDMA, and FDMA, and makes use of technologies including intelligent
Access (TD-SCDMA) antenna, joint detection, low chip rate (LCR), and adaptive power control. With the
flexibility of service processing, a TD-SCDMA network can connect to other networks
through the RNC.
Transmission Control The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
Protocol (TCP) be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
tangent ring A concept borrowed from geometry. Two tangent rings have a common node between
them. The common node often leads to single-point failures.
telecommunications A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
management network network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of
(TMN) equipment, networks, and services.
time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
multiplexing (TDM) (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
time to live (TTL) A specified period of time for best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets from
looping endlessly.
trTCM See two rate three color marker.
traffic engineering (TE) A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 396

traffic engineering A type of database that every router generates after collecting the information about TE
database (TEDB) of every links in its area. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS
TE network.
tributary loopback A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the
tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes: no loopback, outloop, and
inloop.
tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.
two rate three color An algorithm that meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates,
marker (trTCM) Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their
associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it
exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it
exceeds or does not exceed the CIR.

U
UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UAS unavailable second
UBR unspecified bit rate
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UDP See User Datagram Protocol.
UI user interface
UNI See user-to-network interface.
UPC See usage parameter control.
User Datagram A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
Protocol (UDP) datagram to an application program on another. UDP uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP
provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery
service. That is, UDP messages may be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of
order. The destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet
is received.
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
usage parameter During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual
control (UPC) circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures
will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the
incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their
positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface.
user-to-network The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
interface (UNI) example, ATM switches).

V
V-NNI virtual network-network interface

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 397

V-UNI See virtual user-network interface.

VB virtual bridge
VBR See variable bit rate.
VC See virtual container.
VCC See virtual channel connection.
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCG See virtual concatenation group.
VCI virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board.
VLAN virtual local area network
VPI See virtual path identifier.
VPLS virtual private LAN segment
VPN virtual private network
VSWR voltage standing wave ratio
variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
virtual channel A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A point-
connection (VCC) to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple end
points.
virtual circuit A channel or circuit established between two points on a data communications network
with packet switching. Virtual circuits can be permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) or
switched virtual circuits (SVCs) .
virtual concatenation A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
group (VCG) virtual concatenation link.
virtual container (VC) An information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. A VC
consists of a payload and path overhead (POH), which are organized in a block frame
structure that repeats every 125 s or 500 s.
virtual path identifier The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which
(VPI) virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
interface (V-UNI) classification and traffic control in HQoS.

W
WCDMA See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM wavelength division multiplexing
WEEE waste electrical and electronic equipment
WFQ See weighted fair queuing.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 398

WRED See weighted random early detection.

WRR weighted round robin
WTR See wait to restore.
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE
management layer of the transport network.
Wi-Fi See Wireless Fidelity.
Wideband Code A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived
Division Multiple from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
Access (WCDMA)
Wireless Fidelity (Wi- A short-distant wireless transmission technology. It enables wireless access to the
Fi) Internet within a range of hundreds of feet wide.
wait to restore (WTR) The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
(WFQ) scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
detection (WRED) synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.

X
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation.

Issue 01 (2013-12-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 399

RTN950 Configuration Guide U2000 V100R003C03-01
No ratings yet
RTN950 Configuration Guide U2000 V100R003C03-01
2,072 pages
RTN 905 1E&2E V100R007C10 Feature Description 02 PDF
No ratings yet
RTN 905 1E&2E V100R007C10 Feature Description 02 PDF
937 pages
RTN 380A&380AX V100R009C10 Feature Description 02 PDF
No ratings yet
RTN 380A&380AX V100R009C10 Feature Description 02 PDF
289 pages
RTN XMC ODU Hardware Description 11
No ratings yet
RTN XMC ODU Hardware Description 11
200 pages
RTN 900 V100R009C00 Configuration Guide 01
No ratings yet
RTN 900 V100R009C00 Configuration Guide 01
2,019 pages
RTN 950 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) - (V100R003C02 - 02)
No ratings yet
RTN 950 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) - (V100R003C02 - 02)
1,752 pages
OptiX RTN 950 Product Description
No ratings yet
OptiX RTN 950 Product Description
732 pages
RTN 950 IDU Hardware Description - (V100R003C03 - 01)
91% (11)
RTN 950 IDU Hardware Description - (V100R003C03 - 01)
915 pages
RTN 980 V100R006C10 Maintenance Guide 01
No ratings yet
RTN 980 V100R006C10 Maintenance Guide 01
1,002 pages
RTN 980 Product Description (V100R003C00 - 02)
No ratings yet
RTN 980 Product Description (V100R003C00 - 02)
145 pages
RTN 910A Producto
No ratings yet
RTN 910A Producto
484 pages
OptiX PTN 910 Hardware Description V100R002C00 04 PDF
No ratings yet
OptiX PTN 910 Hardware Description V100R002C00 04 PDF
164 pages
OTF803101 OptiX RTN 980L Integrated LH Features Description ISSUE 1.00
No ratings yet
OTF803101 OptiX RTN 980L Integrated LH Features Description ISSUE 1.00
51 pages
RTN 320 V100R007C10 OAU 2A Product Description 02 (20170315)
0% (1)
RTN 320 V100R007C10 OAU 2A Product Description 02 (20170315)
185 pages
RTN 905 S V100R019C10 Product Description 02
No ratings yet
RTN 905 S V100R019C10 Product Description 02
90 pages
RTN 980 V100R007C10 Product Description 02
No ratings yet
RTN 980 V100R007C10 Product Description 02
257 pages
RTN 905 1E&2E V100R007C00 Product Description 01 PDF
100% (3)
RTN 905 1E&2E V100R007C00 Product Description 01 PDF
196 pages
Manual Do Produto 980
No ratings yet
Manual Do Produto 980
471 pages
380AX (P&E Option)
No ratings yet
380AX (P&E Option)
136 pages
RTN 905 S V100R011C10 Commissioning Guide 01
No ratings yet
RTN 905 S V100R011C10 Commissioning Guide 01
123 pages
OptiX RTN 900 V100R009C10 Device Anti-Theft Guide
No ratings yet
OptiX RTN 900 V100R009C10 Device Anti-Theft Guide
20 pages
RTN 950A V100R009C10 Product Description
No ratings yet
RTN 950A V100R009C10 Product Description
265 pages
RTN 950A V100R011C10 Product Description 02 PDF
100% (1)
RTN 950A V100R011C10 Product Description 02 PDF
342 pages
RTN 980 Product Description - (V100R003C02 - 01) - 20110630
No ratings yet
RTN 980 Product Description - (V100R003C02 - 01) - 20110630
147 pages
OptiX RTN 980LH Installation
100% (2)
OptiX RTN 980LH Installation
89 pages
Metro1000 Hardware Description (V300R007C01 - 01) PDF
No ratings yet
Metro1000 Hardware Description (V300R007C01 - 01) PDF
334 pages
Raisecom ROS Switch Configuration Guide Version 4.0
100% (1)
Raisecom ROS Switch Configuration Guide Version 4.0
289 pages
Idu Quick Installation Guide (Indoor) : Optix RTN 980 Radio Transmission System V100
No ratings yet
Idu Quick Installation Guide (Indoor) : Optix RTN 980 Radio Transmission System V100
44 pages
RTN 950 IDU Hardware Description
No ratings yet
RTN 950 IDU Hardware Description
915 pages
RTN 905 1E&2E V100R007C10 Commissioning Guide 02
No ratings yet
RTN 905 1E&2E V100R007C10 Commissioning Guide 02
188 pages
RTN 900 V100R019C00 MIMO User Guide 02
No ratings yet
RTN 900 V100R019C00 MIMO User Guide 02
81 pages
RTN 905 1E&2E V100R006C10 Commissioning Guide 02. (Configure Basic) PDF
No ratings yet
RTN 905 1E&2E V100R006C10 Commissioning Guide 02. (Configure Basic) PDF
180 pages
RTN 950 V100R011C10 Product Description 02 PDF
50% (2)
RTN 950 V100R011C10 Product Description 02 PDF
334 pages
Handling Common Faults and Alarms On The RTN Network-20110711-A
No ratings yet
Handling Common Faults and Alarms On The RTN Network-20110711-A
157 pages
Planning of Line-Of-Sight Radio Relay Systems - Per Thorvaldsen PDF
100% (1)
Planning of Line-Of-Sight Radio Relay Systems - Per Thorvaldsen PDF
203 pages
S7-1200 - General Presentation (2015)
100% (2)
S7-1200 - General Presentation (2015)
41 pages
RTN 950A V100R005C01 IDU Hardware Description 03
No ratings yet
RTN 950A V100R005C01 IDU Hardware Description 03
344 pages
HUAWEI OptiX-310 PDF
No ratings yet
HUAWEI OptiX-310 PDF
152 pages
OptiX OSN 1800 V100R003C01SPC300 Release Notes
100% (1)
OptiX OSN 1800 V100R003C01SPC300 Release Notes
62 pages
Lumenis OPAL Manual 1
No ratings yet
Lumenis OPAL Manual 1
138 pages
RTN 905 V100R005C01 IDU Hardware Description 03
No ratings yet
RTN 905 V100R005C01 IDU Hardware Description 03
167 pages
02 - OTF802103 OptiX RTN 900 System 1.01
No ratings yet
02 - OTF802103 OptiX RTN 900 System 1.01
80 pages
Huawei OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
88% (8)
Huawei OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
159 pages
1+1 HSB-FD-SD Commissioning: Security Level
100% (1)
1+1 HSB-FD-SD Commissioning: Security Level
28 pages
RTN 980 V100 IDU Quick Installation Guide For Outdoor Cabinets (APM30H&TMC11H) 01
No ratings yet
RTN 980 V100 IDU Quick Installation Guide For Outdoor Cabinets (APM30H&TMC11H) 01
34 pages
Optix RTN 320 OAU 2A Product Description
No ratings yet
Optix RTN 320 OAU 2A Product Description
176 pages
OptiX RTN 605 Important Alarms
100% (1)
OptiX RTN 605 Important Alarms
13 pages
RTN900 Series Training FLM V1.0
No ratings yet
RTN900 Series Training FLM V1.0
45 pages
RTN 980L V100 Quick Installation Guide (Split LH, Outdoor Components, Compact BU) 02 PDF
No ratings yet
RTN 980L V100 Quick Installation Guide (Split LH, Outdoor Components, Compact BU) 02 PDF
31 pages
1 Change Coupler Polarization
No ratings yet
1 Change Coupler Polarization
12 pages
1-05 Change Coupler Polarization
No ratings yet
1-05 Change Coupler Polarization
12 pages
Huawei Optix RTN 320f Datasheet
No ratings yet
Huawei Optix RTN 320f Datasheet
4 pages
01-OptiX RTN 900 AM Special Topic
No ratings yet
01-OptiX RTN 900 AM Special Topic
40 pages
KLN 90B Installation Manual
No ratings yet
KLN 90B Installation Manual
152 pages
RTN 950 V100R010C00 IDU Hardware Description
No ratings yet
RTN 950 V100R010C00 IDU Hardware Description
559 pages
RTN XMC ODU Hardware Description (V100 - 11)
100% (1)
RTN XMC ODU Hardware Description (V100 - 11)
69 pages
Jordan Zain Account Common Engineering Program Fixed Network-Outdoor Microwavenot Involving Idu Install, Concrete Floor (With Base) Newscene
No ratings yet
Jordan Zain Account Common Engineering Program Fixed Network-Outdoor Microwavenot Involving Idu Install, Concrete Floor (With Base) Newscene
44 pages
RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description - (V100R003C03 - 01)
100% (2)
RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description - (V100R003C03 - 01)
1,004 pages
RTN Agile IP LH Solution - Mini Version PDF
No ratings yet
RTN Agile IP LH Solution - Mini Version PDF
6 pages
RTN 310 V100R003C00 OAU 1A Product Description 03
No ratings yet
RTN 310 V100R003C00 OAU 1A Product Description 03
152 pages
OptiX RTN 980 Product Introduction
No ratings yet
OptiX RTN 980 Product Introduction
24 pages
RTN 950A V100R011C10 IDU Hardware Description 02 PDF
100% (2)
RTN 950A V100R011C10 IDU Hardware Description 02 PDF
531 pages
Optix RTN 980: Provides A Seamless Microwave Transmission Solution For Mobile Communication Network or Private Networks
No ratings yet
Optix RTN 980: Provides A Seamless Microwave Transmission Solution For Mobile Communication Network or Private Networks
2 pages
Cisco IP RAN Architecture PDF
No ratings yet
Cisco IP RAN Architecture PDF
54 pages
Camp Over
No ratings yet
Camp Over
54 pages
M87x Modbus Plus Manual
No ratings yet
M87x Modbus Plus Manual
60 pages
ITU-R P.530-14 (Eng) PDF
No ratings yet
ITU-R P.530-14 (Eng) PDF
53 pages
Sooxma Tech Project List
No ratings yet
Sooxma Tech Project List
18 pages
Mobile and Wireless Communication Complete Lecture Notes #9
No ratings yet
Mobile and Wireless Communication Complete Lecture Notes #9
19 pages
RTN 910 Brochure
No ratings yet
RTN 910 Brochure
2 pages
Huawei RTN 980L Brochure
100% (1)
Huawei RTN 980L Brochure
2 pages
Chapter 4 Digital Keypad Operation
No ratings yet
Chapter 4 Digital Keypad Operation
4 pages
Indian Institue of Technology 1
No ratings yet
Indian Institue of Technology 1
186 pages
VectaStar2 - Datasheet (Eng)
No ratings yet
VectaStar2 - Datasheet (Eng)
4 pages
UMTS Traffic Migration Capacity Audi-V1
No ratings yet
UMTS Traffic Migration Capacity Audi-V1
5 pages
CTNM 12
No ratings yet
CTNM 12
6 pages
EET201Question and Answers
No ratings yet
EET201Question and Answers
19 pages
s5800 Series Installation Guide
No ratings yet
s5800 Series Installation Guide
31 pages
Description and Adjusting Instructions Additional Module "CUN1" For Voltage Regulator "Cosimat N"
No ratings yet
Description and Adjusting Instructions Additional Module "CUN1" For Voltage Regulator "Cosimat N"
5 pages
ICL7106, ICL7107, ICL7106S, ICL7107S: 3 / Digit, LCD/LED Display, A/D Converters
No ratings yet
ICL7106, ICL7107, ICL7106S, ICL7107S: 3 / Digit, LCD/LED Display, A/D Converters
17 pages
Principles of The WCDMA System: Internal
No ratings yet
Principles of The WCDMA System: Internal
46 pages
DSP Lab File
No ratings yet
DSP Lab File
26 pages
Line Style Editor User Guide
No ratings yet
Line Style Editor User Guide
20 pages
Analog Electronic Circuits (ECE 201)
No ratings yet
Analog Electronic Circuits (ECE 201)
3 pages
Operational Amplifier
No ratings yet
Operational Amplifier
83 pages
RIO Digital Audio Receiver User Guide
No ratings yet
RIO Digital Audio Receiver User Guide
50 pages
WA-54 (U) (UX) Pro User Manual (English) PDF
No ratings yet
WA-54 (U) (UX) Pro User Manual (English) PDF
9 pages
CS 321 Computer Organization & Assembly Language: Princes Nora Bint Abdul Rahman University
No ratings yet
CS 321 Computer Organization & Assembly Language: Princes Nora Bint Abdul Rahman University
14 pages
IPTV Over HFC PDF
No ratings yet
IPTV Over HFC PDF
24 pages
Airlinx Emgw Data Sheet 1005
No ratings yet
Airlinx Emgw Data Sheet 1005
2 pages
Flexible Mode Bridgeless Boost PFC Rectifier With High Efficiency Over A Wide Range of Input Voltage
No ratings yet
Flexible Mode Bridgeless Boost PFC Rectifier With High Efficiency Over A Wide Range of Input Voltage
43 pages
Nstallation Uide: A Scsi C 29320
No ratings yet
Nstallation Uide: A Scsi C 29320
14 pages
Selected For GD Round-Sree Chaitanya College of Engineering - Karimnagar, Telangana (Responses) - GD Sheet
No ratings yet
Selected For GD Round-Sree Chaitanya College of Engineering - Karimnagar, Telangana (Responses) - GD Sheet
3 pages
Voyager XP 1470g PDF
No ratings yet
Voyager XP 1470g PDF
2 pages
مشروع 150كيلو - Model
No ratings yet
مشروع 150كيلو - Model
1 page
RADWIN 500 User Manual 5
No ratings yet
RADWIN 500 User Manual 5
368 pages
BTS3900 Product Description
0% (1)
BTS3900 Product Description
57 pages
Quality of Service (QoS) and Policy Management in Mobile Data Networks
No ratings yet
Quality of Service (QoS) and Policy Management in Mobile Data Networks
23 pages
Ebooks File Circuit Theory and Transmission Lines 2nd Edition Ravish R. Singh All Chapters
100% (4)
Ebooks File Circuit Theory and Transmission Lines 2nd Edition Ravish R. Singh All Chapters
49 pages
Temperature Controller: HY Series
No ratings yet
Temperature Controller: HY Series
1 page
HK231 CO2036 Lab01 2053321 NgoChanPhong
No ratings yet
HK231 CO2036 Lab01 2053321 NgoChanPhong
5 pages
Inverter Load Calculator Trekbook India
No ratings yet
Inverter Load Calculator Trekbook India
4 pages